Second Edition
22_JL_OM_EN_USC
2022 WRANGLER
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2022 WRANGLER
OWNER’S MANUAL
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 9
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 116
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................139
5 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................207
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 275
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................330
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................347
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................417
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................428
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................432
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 10
ROLLOVER WARNING .......................................... 10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 11
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 16
Key Fob .............................................................16
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 18
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 19
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................19
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) .... 21
How To Use Remote Start................................21
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................22
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................22
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped .......................................................22
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................23
Remote Start Cancel Message........................23
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ......... 23
How To Use Remote Start................................23
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 24
To Arm The System .........................................24
To Disarm The System ....................................24
Rearming Of The System .................................25
DOORS ....................................................................25
Manual Door Locks ..........................................25
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ....................26
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) ....................................................26
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped........................................................28
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors........................................................28
Front Door Removal .........................................29
Rear Door Removal
(Four-Door Models) .........................................32
Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped
S
.............34
Half-Door Installation — If Equipped
S
........36
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................42
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................42
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped............42
SEATS .....................................................................43
Manual Adjustment Front Seats .....................43
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door
Models ..............................................................45
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door
Models ..............................................................45
Heated Seats — If Equipped............................47
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped....................47
Head Restraints ...............................................48
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........................ 50
Introducing Voice Recognition ........................50
Basic Voice Commands ...................................50
Get Started .......................................................51
Additional Information .....................................51
MIRRORS ............................................................... 51
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................51
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............................52
Outside Mirrors ................................................52
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................53
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...........................53
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
S
...................... 53
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® ......................................................53
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels............54
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................54
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ..............................................................54
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device......................................55
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button ...............................................................55
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........55
Security .............................................................56
Troubleshooting Tips........................................56
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 57
Headlight Switch...............................................57
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .......................................................58
High/Low Beam Switch....................................58
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .......................................................58
Flash-To-Pass....................................................58
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............58
Lights-On Reminder..........................................59
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped........................59
Turn Signals......................................................59
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................59
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 59
Interior Courtesy Lights....................................59
Dimmer Controls ..............................................60
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............. 60
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........................60
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped ...61
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................. 62
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................62
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................65
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped........................................................67
Climate Voice Commands ...............................67
Operating Tips .................................................68
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............69
Storage..............................................................69
USB/AUX Control..............................................69
Power Outlets ..................................................71
Power Inverter — If Equipped .........................72
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ....................73
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ....................75
Auto-Down Feature .........................................75
Window Lockout Switch...................................76
Wind Buffeting .................................................76
WRANGLER TOPS .................................................76
Provided Tools ..................................................76
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
Position
S
......................................................76
Raising The Soft Top
S
.................................87
Removing The Soft Top
S
.............................90
Installing The Soft Top .....................................91
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal
S
............93
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation...............97
Removing The Hard Top ..................................97
Installing The Hard Top....................................99
Sunrider® For Hard Top ..................................99
Power Sliding Top — If Equipped.................. 102
DOOR FRAME ..................................................... 106
Door Frame Removal .................................... 107
Door Frame Installation Four Door
Models — If Equipped.................................... 107
Door Frame Installation Two Door
Models — If Equipped.................................... 109
FOLDING WINDSHIELD ......................................109
Lowering The Windshield.............................. 110
Raising The Windshield ................................ 112
HOOD ....................................................................112
Opening The Hood ........................................ 112
Closing The Hood .......................................... 113
REAR SWING GATE .............................................113
Cargo Area Features .................................... 114
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ......................................116
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .................. 120
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ......................120
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls.......................................................... 121
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped................... 121
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items .............................................................. 122
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................... 125
Diesel Displays .............................................. 126
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages ... 127
Fuel System Messages................................. 128
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................128
Red Warning Lights ....................................... 128
Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 131
Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 134
Green Indicator Lights................................... 135
White Indicator Lights ................................... 136
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 137
Gray Indicator Lights ..................................... 137
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......137
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ................................................. 137
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................................................138
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) ......................................................139
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........... 139
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....... 139
Normal Starting ............................................ 139
AutoPark ........................................................ 140
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) .......................................................... 141
Extended Park Starting ................................. 141
If Engine Fails To Start .................................. 142
After Starting.................................................. 142
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)...................................................... 142
Automatic Transmission ............................... 143
Extreme Cold Weather .................................. 143
Normal Starting ............................................. 143
Starting Fluids ............................................... 144
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE......... 144
Cold Weather Precautions............................ 145
Engine Idling .................................................. 145
Stopping The Engine ..................................... 146
Cooling System Tips — Automatic
Transmission ................................................. 146
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ................... 147
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ......................... 147
PARKING BRAKE................................................. 148
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED....... 149
Shifting........................................................... 150
Downshifting.................................................. 151
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 151
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 152
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .......................................................... 153
8–Speed Automatic Transmission .............. 153
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ...................157
Four-Position Transfer Case —
If Equipped ................................................... 157
Five-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped .. 159
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ................ 161
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear —
If Equipped ................................................... 161
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only —
If Equipped ................................................... 162
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
If Equipped ................................................... 162
Off Road+ — If Equipped............................... 163
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING .......164
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ........................165
Autostop Mode .............................................. 165
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop......................................................... 166
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode.............................................................. 166
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 167
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 167
System Malfunction ...................................... 167
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) .........................167
Autostop Mode .............................................. 168
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop......................................................... 168
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode .............................................................. 168
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 169
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 169
System Malfunction ...................................... 169
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................169
Cruise Control................................................ 169
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...................... 171
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................180
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 180
ParkSense Warning Display.......................... 180
ParkSense Display ........................................ 180
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 182
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System ........................................................... 182
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 183
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 183
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............184
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................185
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ....................................... 186
Fuel Filler Cap................................................ 186
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................... 187
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ....................................... 187
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel ................... 188
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel................... 188
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 188
VEHICLE LOADING .............................................. 191
Certification Label ......................................... 191
TRAILER TOWING ............................................... 192
Common Towing Definitions......................... 192
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 193
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ............................................ 194
Trailer And Tongue Weight............................ 194
Towing Requirements ................................... 195
Towing Tips .................................................... 197
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ..................................................... 198
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................... 198
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 198
DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 200
On-Road Driving Tips..................................... 200
Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 200
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................207
CYBERSECURITY .................................................207
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................207
Customer Programmable Features ............. 208
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION................................222
System Overview .......................................... 222
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ................................ 225
Safety And General Information................... 225
UCONNECT MODES .............................................226
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................... 226
Radio Mode .................................................. 227
Media Mode ................................................. 236
Phone Mode ................................................. 239
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................250
Android Auto™
S
........................................ 250
Apple CarPlay®
S
...................................... 252
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks ...................................................... 254
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................254
Is My Vehicle Connected? ............................ 254
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services ........................................................ 254
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services ........................................................ 256
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .......................... 257
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account.. 267
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ...........................267
Connected Services SOS FAQs —
If Equipped .................................................... 267
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Unlock FAQs .................................................. 267
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs .............................................................. 268
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
If Equipped .................................................... 268
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ... 268
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs — If Equipped ................... 269
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs .............................................................. 269
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights
FAQs ............................................................... 269
Connected Services Account FAQs —
If Equipped..................................................... 270
Data Collection & Privacy.............................. 271
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......272
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 272
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ....................272
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................... 273
Drivetrain ...................................................... 273
Accessory Gauge .......................................... 274
Pitch & Roll ................................................... 274
TrailCam — If Equipped ................................. 274
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 275
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 275
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 276
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 284
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped .................................................... 284
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ............................... 288
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 290
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 295
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 295
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 295
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 296
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 302
Child Restraints............................................. 314
SAFETY TIPS ........................................................ 327
Transporting Passengers.............................. 327
Transporting Pets.......................................... 327
Connected Vehicles ...................................... 327
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 327
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 329
Exhaust Gas................................................... 329
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 329
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................330
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......330
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................333
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 333
Jack Location ................................................ 334
Spare Tire Removal ...................................... 335
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 335
JUMP STARTING .................................................338
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 338
Jump Starting Procedure.............................. 340
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................341
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...................................341
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................343
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................344
Four Wheel Drive Models ............................. 345
Without The Key Fob..................................... 345
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......... 345
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..................................................................346
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING —
GASOLINE ENGINE .............................................347
Maintenance Plan......................................... 348
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE ....351
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To B5
Biodiesel ........................................................ 352
Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20
Biodiesel ........................................................ 354
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................355
2.0L Gasoline Engine ................................... 355
3.6L Gasoline Engine ................................... 356
3.0L Diesel Engine ........................................ 357
Checking Oil Level ......................................... 358
Adding Washer Fluid ..................................... 358
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 358
Pressure Washing ......................................... 359
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ....................................359
Engine Oil....................................................... 360
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 360
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 360
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine................................................. 362
Fuel Filter Replacement — Diesel Engine .... 363
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of
Fuel — Diesel Engine .................................... 364
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow ................................. 365
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 365
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 366
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 366
Body Lubrication............................................ 368
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 368
Exhaust System ............................................ 370
Cooling System.............................................. 371
Brake System ............................................... 374
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................... 375
Transfer Case ............................................... 376
Manual Transmission — If Equipped............ 376
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...... 376
Fuses ............................................................. 377
Bulb Replacement......................................... 387
TIRES ................................................................... 391
Tire Safety Information ................................. 391
Tires — General Information......................... 398
Tire Types....................................................... 401
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 402
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 404
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 405
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 406
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................... 406
Treadwear...................................................... 406
Traction Grades............................................. 406
Temperature Grades..................................... 407
STORING THE VEHICLE....................................... 407
BODYWORK ......................................................... 408
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 408
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 408
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 409
INTERIORS ...........................................................411
Carpet Safety Information ............................ 411
Carpet Removal............................................. 411
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 415
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 416
Leather Surfaces........................................... 416
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 416
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........417
BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................417
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..417
Torque Specifications ................................... 417
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE ...418
2.0L Engine ................................................... 418
3.6L Engine ................................................... 418
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 418
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 418
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 419
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................... 419
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...... 419
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 419
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 420
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ........420
Diesel Fuel Specifications ............................ 421
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ....................... 421
FLUID CAPACITIES ..............................................423
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................424
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................426
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................428
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 428
Prepare A List ................................................ 428
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 428
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 428
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 428
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 428
Mexico............................................................ 428
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 429
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY) ...................................................... 429
Service Contract ........................................... 429
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................429
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................430
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................430
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 430
In Canada ...................................................... 430
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................430
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................431
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 200.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped" or, if applicable, refer
to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way.
FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical
and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
1
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles
can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions
that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of
severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use
of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 128.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 128
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 128
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 129
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 129
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 129
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 129
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 130
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 130
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 130
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 130
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 130
Red Warning Lights
1
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
Ú page 130
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 131
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 131
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 131
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 131
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 132
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 132
Red Warning Lights
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 132
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 132
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 132
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure Warning Light
Ú page 132
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 133
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 133
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 133
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 133
Yellow Warning Lights
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Ú page 134
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 133
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light
Ú page 134
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 134
4WD Part Time Indicator Light
Ú page 134
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
Ú page 134
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Yellow Warning Lights
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Neutral Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light
Ú page 135
Sway Bar Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Wait To Start Light
Ú page 135
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
Ú page 136
4WD Auto Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 136
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
Ú page 136
2WD High Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 137
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 137
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you
to lock or unlock the doors and swing gate from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. The key fob also contains a
mechanical key.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at
2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
Key Fob
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only
with the key fob facing away from your body,
especially your eyes and objects that may be
damaged, such as clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key fob
may be damaged if the key fob is subjected to
strong electrical shocks. In order to ensure
complete efficiency of the electronic devices
inside of the key fob, avoid exposing the key fob
to direct sunlight.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — LED Indicator
3 — Unlock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Panic Button
6 — Lock Button
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
condition may be indicated by a message in the
instrument cluster display, or by the LED light on
the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illu-
minates from key fob button pushes, then the
key fob battery requires replacement.
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be
harmful to the environment. Please see an
authorized dealer for proper battery disposal
Ú page 431.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock
all the doors and swing gate. To lock all the doors,
push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through the Uconnect
Settings Ú page 207.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Fob
Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the
instrument cluster display along with an interior
chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also
be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2450.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be
indicated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster,
and the fob LED will no longer illuminate with a
button press.
1. Remove the back cover of the fob by inserting
a flat-blade screwdriver into the slot on the
bottom of the fob. Pry until the cover unsnaps
being careful not to damage the seal. Proceed
counterclockwise to pry the remaining snaps
until the battery cover can be removed.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a
small flat-blade screwdriver into the battery
removal slot and sliding the battery forward
and up being careful not to damage the
electronic board underneath.
Battery Replacement
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making
sure the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the
battery until it is seated securely below the
tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is
properly aligned before snapping it back in
place.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always remember to place the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the OFF position.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 431.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF,
ACC, RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
alarm, etc.) are available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — RUN
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of the START/STOP ignition button, the
key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this
situation, a backup method can be used to operate
the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side with the mechanical flip key) against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to operate
the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
Do Not Use Mechanical Key
CAUTION!
Do not use the Mechanical Key against the
START/STOP ignition button.
Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screw-
driver etc.) to pry the button out of the ignition
switch. This button comes as an assembly,
and is not removable. This can damage the
silicone shield.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE:
For more information on normal starting, see
Ú page 139.
When opening the driver's door with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a
chime will sound to remind you to place the igni-
tion in the OFF position. In addition to the chime,
the message will display “Ignition Or Accessory
On” in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote
Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 431.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors and swing gate will lock, the turn signals will
flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Pushing
the Remote Start button again will shut the engine
off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10
seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Swing gate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
All removable doors must not be removed
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) not illuminated
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle
Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will
resume previously set operations (temperature,
blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if programmed in the comfort
menu screen within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 207. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when the
Remote Start is activated, if programmed in the
comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the
climate control settings depending on the outside
ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on the
outside ambient temperature. When the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate
controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 62.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is
in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the
climate controls off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Swing Gate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
300 ft (91 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote
Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
fob may reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait
To Start Indicator Light Ú page 128 to extin-
guish before cranking the engine. This allows
time for the engine pre-heat cycle to heat the
cylinder air, and is normal in cold weather.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors and swing gate will lock, the turn signals will
flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Pushing
the Remote Start button again will shut the engine
off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Swing gate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated
Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated
For additional Remote Start information, see
Ú page 22.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition
switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm
is activated, the interior switches for door locks are
disabled. The Vehicle Security system provides
both audible and visible signals. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will
provide the following audible and visible signals:
the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in
the instrument cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 26.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
Ú page 26.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type
door lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your
vehicle, push the rocker lever forward to the lock
position and close the door. To unlock the door,
push the rocker lever rearward.
Manual Door Lock
NOTE:
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or
unlock the doors, swing gate (if equipped with a
lock), glove compartment, and console storage.
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable
door panels may damage the seals, causing
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a
collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
drive, as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the
ignition and remove the key from the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switch is located on each front
door panel. Push the switch forward to unlock the
doors, and rearward to lock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ —
P
ASSIVE ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED )
The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and
swing gate without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within
the Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may interfere with the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp, posi-
tion lamps) for whichever time duration is set
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and, if equipped, will arm the
Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all
doors and the swing gate automatically.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a
collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
drive, as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the
ignition and remove the key from the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system Ú page 207.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function
only if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with a
START/STOP ignition. There are three situations
that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive
Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert
the customer. If Passive Entry is disabled using
Uconnect system, the key protection described in
this section remains active/functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a
FOBIK-Safe operation when a valid Passive Entry
key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle
will not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are true:
A second valid passive entry key fob is detected
outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a
Passive Entry door handle).
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch, and then the doors
are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front
door handles, pushing the Passive Entry lock button
will lock the vehicle doors and the swing gate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door
panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate
The swing gate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the swing gate handle. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the swing gate
handle, grab the swing gate handle to unlock the
swing gate automatically, and pull the swing gate
to open.
Swing Gate Passive Entry Lock Button
To Lock The Swing Gate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the swing gate handle, pushing the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle doors
and the swing gate.
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using any Passive Entry door handle.
This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle
is locked by pulling the door handle without the
vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted Ú page 431.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition
is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The Automatic Door Lock
feature can be enabled or disabled by an
authorized dealer per written request of the
customer. Please see an authorized dealer for
service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat-blade screwdriver (or mechanical key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock lever rearward (located on the
door trim panel), roll down the window and open
the door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open a
door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is
impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be sure to
check that there is no one left inside.
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
Door Removal Warning Label
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the
doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see an
authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-mounted
outside mirror. Federal law requires outside
mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200.
When front doors are removed, the message
“Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will
display in the instrument cluster display. Power
Mirrors and Power Door Locks will also be
unavailable.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation only.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during
off-road operation with doors removed. For
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200.
Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in
the event of an accident.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the front doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper
and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx
head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door under
the instrument panel by sliding the plastic
panel along the door frame toward the seats
until the tabs are detached.
Wiring Access Door
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the
wiring harness.
Closed Wiring Harness
5. Push and hold down the black security tab
under the wiring harness, and lift the harness
lever into the open position.
Open Wiring Harness
6. With the wiring harness open, pull straight
downward on the wiring connector to unplug.
Store the wiring connector in the lower door
basket.
1 – Red Locking Tab
2 – Wiring Harness Lever
1 – Wiring Harness Lever (Open Position)
2 – Black Security Tab
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
7. With the door in the open position, remove the
check bolt from the door check attachment on
the bodyside (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
Door Check (Detached)
8. With the door open, lift the door with the help
of another person, to clear the hinge pins from
their hinges and remove the door.
To Install The Front Doors
1. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the
door, and lower them into the body hinges on
the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place during instal-
lation.
Hinge Pin Locations
2. With the door in the open position, align the
door check bracket with the hole on the
bodyside. Insert the check screw and tighten
using a #40 Torx head driver to 19.9 ft· lb
(27.0 N·m).
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws
into the body hinges. Tighten the screws using
a #T50 Torx head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
Replacing The Wiring Connector Into The Wiring
Harness
To reinstall the wiring connector on the vehicle’s
door into the harness just inside the vehicle,
proceed as follows:
NOTE:
Make sure there is plenty of slack on the wiring
connector during installation. Close the door
slightly to provide more slack if needed.
CAUTION!
Do not close the door before reattaching the
door check to the body. Damage may occur to
the door check.
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to
the vehicle’s parts will occur.
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during
door install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. With light finger pressure, seat the wiring
connector
straight
into the wiring harness
until the wiring harness lever starts to lower
with the latching pin.
Connecting The Wiring Harness
2. After the harness lever has started to move
with the pressure of seating the wiring
connector, continue by lowering the wiring
harness lever to the fully closed position.
Fully Closed Position
3. Push the red locking tab downward to lock into
place.
4. Attach the cloth strap of the door onto the
metal hook just inside the vehicle.
Cloth Strap Attachment
5. Replace wiring access doors.
REAR DOOR REMOVAL
(F
OUR-DOOR MODELS)
Door Removal Warning Label
1 — Seat Connector Straight Into Harness
2 — Wiring Harness Lever Starts To Lower
CAUTION!
Failure to correctly reconnect the wiring
connector into the harness will result in damage
that is not covered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation only.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200.
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper
and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx
head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access
door from the bottom of the B-pillar.
Wiring Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness.
This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the
wiring connector to be unplugged.
Wiring Connector
6. Remove the check screw from the center door
check (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
Door Check (Attached)
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during
off-road operation with doors removed. For
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200.
Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in
the event of an accident.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. With the door open, lift the door with the help
of another person, to clear the hinge pins from
their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps
in the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
used to assist in guiding the door into place when
reinstalling.
DOOR OFF MIRROR KIT — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped with the Door Off Mirror Kit, exterior
rearview mirrors can be installed on to the upper
body door hinges after the front doors have been
removed.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Door Off Mirror
To install the Door Off Mirrors, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front doors
Ú
page 29.
2. Remove the cowl bolt closest to the door
opening using a #40 Torx head driver, and
store in a safe location.
Cowl Bolt Location
3. Push the mirror bracket forward onto the
A-pillar, making sure to align the bottom of the
bracket with the upper door hinge, and the
hole from the removed cowl bolt.
Push Bracket Onto A-pillar
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during
off-road operation with doors removed. For
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200.
Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in
the event of an accident.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
4. Place the bracket bushing behind the mirror
bracket (over the cowl bolt hole), then insert
the bracket bolt into the mirror bracket,
through the bracket bushing.
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
5. Insert the hinge shoulder bolt through the
bottom of the upper door hinge up into the
mirror bracket, then rotate the bracket knob
toward the rear of the vehicle to secure the
mirror bracket to the A-pillar.
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
6. Tighten both the bracket bolt and the hinge
shoulder bolt with a #40 Torx head driver.
Recommended torque specification for the
bracket bolt is 6 ft-lb (8 N·m), and 7.5 ft-lb
(10 N·m) for the hinge shoulder bolt.
7. Lower the mirror assembly onto the mirror
bracket.
Lower Mirror Assembly Onto Bracket
8. Insert the three mirror screws into the mirror
assembly, and tighten into the mirror bracket
using a #30 Torx head driver. Recommended
torque specification for the mirror screws is
4 ft-lb (5.5 N·m).
Mirror Screw Locations
1 — Bracket Bushing
2 — Bracket Bolt
1 — Bracket Knob
2 — Hinge Shoulder Bolt
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
9. Repeat the steps on the other side of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
If this kit is being installed with the optional lamp
bracket, the bracket bushing from step 4 is not
needed. Use the spacer from the lamp bracket.
HALF-DOOR INSTALLATION —
I
F EQUIPPED
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
This vehicle may be equipped with
half-doors. To install the
half-doors in the vehicle, follow
the instruction sheet packaged in
the box the doors were received
in. Replacement parts may be purchased through
Mopar® Service.
To install the front or rear half-doors, proceed as
follows:
1. Remove the full doors from the vehicle. For
front door removal, see
Ú
page 29
. For rear
door removal, see Ú
page 32.
2. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the
lower half-door, and lower them into the body
hinges on the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place during instal-
lation.
Lower Half-Door Hinge Pins
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws
into the body hinges. Tighten the screws using
a #T50 Torx head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
CAUTION!
Do not run half-doors through an automatic
car wash. This may result in scratches and
wax buildup on the windows.
Careless handling and storage of the
half-doors may damage the seals resulting in
water leaks into the interior of the vehicle.
The upper half-doors must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water leaks into the interior of the
vehicle.
Store the zipper pulls of the upper half-door
windows at the upper B-pillar area for both
front and rear doors to avoid damage to the
windows when not in use.
Do not attempt to operate the half-door zipper
in temperatures of 41°F (5°C) or below.
Damage to the window may occur.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not close the door before reattaching the
door check to the body. Damage may occur to
the door check.
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to
the vehicle’s parts will occur.
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during
door install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
4. Attach the cloth strap of the lower half-door to
the metal hook just inside the vehicle.
Cloth Strap Attachment
5. Connect the wiring harness on the lower
half-door to the connection just inside the
vehicle.
NOTE:
For front doors, make sure the wiring harness is
closed completely.
Front Door Wiring Harness
6. Replace wiring access doors.
7. When the half-doors are shipped with the
vehicle, the lower half-doors will have plugs in
the post holes that must be removed prior to
upper half-door installation. To remove these
plugs, proceed as follows:
a. Locate the service hole in the center of each
plug of the lower half-door (two on each
front and rear door).
b. Place a tool (hook tool or trim stick is recom-
mended) in the service hole.
Place Tool Into Service Hole Of Plug To Remove
c. Using the tool, slowly pull upwards from the
center of the plug to remove.
8. Making sure the window on the upper
half-door is completely zipped closed, insert
the upper half-door into the lower half-door by
placing the posts into the post holes.
Lower The Upper Half-Door Into Post Holes
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
1 — Open Wiring Harness
2 — Closed Wiring Harness
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
9. Push down firmly on the inside of the upper
half-door until it is fully seated in the lower half.
Push Down To Fully Seat Upper Half-Door
Door Latch Alignment
Check Door Latch And Striker Alignment
NOTE:
Only adjust the door to fit correctly against the
striker. DO NOT adjust the striker, as this could
affect the positioning of the full door.
If the door does not center align between the latch
and the striker, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the
door hinges using the provided #T50 Torx
head driver.
Hinge Bolt Locations
2. With the bolts loose, hold the door in the
almost closed position, and check that the
latch and striker align.
3. With the latch and striker aligned, proceed to
close the door softly and tighten the hinge
bolts to 20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max Torque:
27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
Lower Door Adjustment
1 — Push Down On Inside Of Upper Half-Door
2 — Fully Seated Upper Half-Door
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly
set the door almost to the closing position and
check how the door latch aligns with the body
striker. Touch condition between these
components can result in damage to both the
door and the striker.
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly
close each door to check for body contact.
Improper setting of the door hinges can cause
extreme non-uniform conditions, and result in
damage to the body around the door.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
If the door does not latch properly after
installation, if there is interference between the
panels, or if a non-uniform gap around the door is
observed when the door is closed (example: door
position appears to be low and too far rearward),
the position of the door on its hinges may need to
be adjusted. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the
door hinges using the provided #T50 Torx
head driver.
Hinge Bolt Locations
NOTE:
Do not adjust the body mounted hinges, or any part
of the door latch, as modifications to these parts
will affect installation of the full door.
2. With the bolts loose, the door can be moved
forward by pushing the door handle toward the
front of the vehicle, and/or upward by grabbing
the door handle and lifting towards the roof.
3. Once the gaps between the door and vehicle
body are uniform around the entire door,
tighten the door hinge bolts to 20.3 ft· lb /
27.5 N·m (Max Torque: 27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
Upper Door Adjustment
After installation of the half-doors, if water leaks or
wind noise is observed, the seal of the upper
half-door to the door opening may need to be
adjusted.
To determine if the upper half-door needs to be
adjusted, proceed as follows:
1. Determine which door is affected.
2. Open the affected door and hold a dollar-size
piece of paper along the top of the door
opening against the vehicle near where the
leak/noise was observed. Make sure half of
the paper is above the area where the door
seal contacts the door opening, while the other
half is below.
3. Close the door on the paper, then pull the
paper upward. If the paper moves with little to
no effort, the upper half-door will need to be
adjusted in that area to increase seal
compression.
Performing A Paper Test
There is another optional test that can be
performed using a flashlight and the help of
another person.
One person should be inside the vehicle, and move
the flashlight around the periphery of the door
seal, shining outward. The other person should
stand outside of the vehicle and check for light
passing by the seal. If light is seen through the seal
area, the door will need to be adjusted.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust the seal compression, proceed as
follows:
1. Open the door and lift the upper half-door up
and away from the lower half. Lay the upper
half-door on a clean, dry surface.
2. Using an 8 mm open-end wrench (not
provided), loosen the nut located inside the
bottom of the upper half-door post, closest to
where the “paper test” detected a gap.
Nut Location Inside Bottom Of Post
3. Using a 3 mm Allen wrench (not provided),
rotate the screw on the side of the post
counterclockwise (while holding the wrench on
the loosened bolt) to increase the seal
compression. If needed, rotate clockwise to
reduce seal compression.
Rotate Screw For Seal Compression
4. Tighten the nut inside the bottom of the post
using the wrench and make sure the screw
head is flush to the post. Reinstall the upper
half-door.
Screw Head Flush To Post
5. Close the door and repeat the “paper test”.
Repeat the adjustment procedure if needed.
1 — 3 mm Allen Wrench
2 — 8 mm Open-End Wrench
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
6. If needed, add the provided shim to a lower
half-door pocket to seal the upper half-door to
the roof:
a. Lift upper half-door up and away from lower
half.
b. Clean the bottom of the door pocket.
Remove Upper Half-Door & Clean Bottom Of Door Pocket
c. Slide the shim onto a pencil or similar tool.
d. Remove the paper backing from the adhe-
sive side of the shim and place the shim
with pencil into the pocket.
e. Press the shim firmly to the bottom of the
pocket, and remove the pencil once the
shim is firmly in place.
Press Shim Firmly Into Bottom Of Pocket
f. Replace upper half-door.
NOTE:
If the compression is increased too much on the
front upper corner of the rear doors, deformation
of the seal will occur.
Half-Door Removal
To remove the half-doors, repeat the installation
steps in reverse order.
NOTE:
When removing the upper half-doors, push upward
firmly on the middle of the upper half-door until the
posts detach from the lower half.
Push Upward To Remove Upper Half-Door
1 — Remove Paper Backing From Shim
2 — Slide Pencil through Hole In Shim
3 — Press Pencil With Shim Into Pocket
1 — Fully Seated Upper Half-Door
2 — Push Upward On Middle Of Upper Half-Door
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located on the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control
handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel upward
or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the climate or controls screen of the
touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 22.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT SEATS
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion,
near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the
bar located under the seat cushion and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to
be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Adjustment Bar Location
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by
using the ratcheting handle, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the
handle to raise the seat, push downward on the
handle to lower the seat. Several strokes may be
necessary to achieve the desired position.
Seat Height Adjustment
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and
lean forward or backward, depending on the
direction you would like the seatback to move.
Release the strap when the desired position is
reached and the seatback will lock into place.
Recline Strap
Lumbar Support
The lumbar control knob is located on the outboard
side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control
forward to increase and rearward to decrease the
desired amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Knob
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat —
Two Door Models
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the
outboard side of the seatback, and slide the entire
seat forward.
Easy Entry Lever
To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the
seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
rearward until the track locks.
NOTE:
The front passenger seats have a track memory,
which returns the seat to its original position.
The recline strap and easy entry lever should not
be used during the automatic returning of the
seat to its sitting position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
60/40 S PLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT —
F
OUR DOOR MODELS
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat
can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo
space.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat
to fold down easily.
The center head restraints must be in the lowest
position to avoid contact with the center console
when folding the seat.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
There are two release levers located on each upper
outboard side of the rear seat. The larger of the two
release levers folds down the seat and the head
restraint simultaneously. The smaller lever folds
down the head restraint independently for
improved visibility.
To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release
lever and slowly fold down the seatback. The head
restraint will fold automatically with the seat when
this lever is pulled.
Seatback Release Lever
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are
left folded for an extended period of time. This is
normal. By simply unfolding the seats to the open
position, the seat cushion will return to its normal
shape over time.
To Raise The Rear Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then,
raise the head restraint until it locks into place. If
interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
FOLD AND TUMBLE REAR SEAT —
T
WO DOOR MODELS
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to reposition the front seats.
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat
to fold down easily.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Folding The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the
seatback forward.
Rear Seatback Release Lever
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Using The Retention Straps
1. There are two retention straps located on the
back of the rear seat and two corresponding
wire loops located on the back of each
B-pillar. Open the hook-and-loop fastener on
the strap and thread through the wire loop.
Fold the hook-and-loop fastener over to keep
the seat in the folded position. This should be
done on both sides.
Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap
2. To return the seat to its normal upright
position, reverse these steps.
Removing The Rear Seat
1. Push down on the release bar on each side,
and pull the seat out and away from the lower
bracket.
Release Bar Location
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse these
steps.
NOTE:
Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching the
rear seat latches.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always be
sure that the seats are fully latched.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The heated seat control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel
below the touchscreen and also in the
Climate Control touchscreen menu.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to
turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 22.
REAR SEAT ARMREST — IF EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used
as a rear armrest with cupholders. To unfold it,
grab the pull strap under the head restraint and
pull it forward.
Rear Seat Armrest
NOTE:
The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button located on the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint. The release button does not need to be
pushed to adjust the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the adjustment button and the
release button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable, but
foldable head restraints.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the
release strap located on the upper outboard side
of each rear seat.
Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Location
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
(Continued)
Rear Head Restraints Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward position,
lift up on the head restraint until it locks into place.
For information on child seat tether routing, see
Ú page 295.
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but
foldable, outboard head restraints, as well as an
adjustable, removable center head restraint.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the
inner release lever, located on the upper part of
the rear seat.
Rear Head Restraint Lever
Rear Head Restraint Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward position,
lift up on the head restraint until it locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the
head restraint. To lower the center head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the base of
the head restraint, and push down on the head
restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, push the
release button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and pull upward on the head restraint.
To install the head restraint, hold the release
button while pushing downward on the head
restraint. For information on child seat tether
routing, see Ú page 295.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact
with the center console when folding the seat
down.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat
head restraints installed while passengers are
occupying the rear seat. In a collision, people
riding in this area without the head restraints
installed are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always
securely stow removed head restraints in a
location outside the occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat
head restraints installed while passengers are
occupying the rear seat. In a collision, people
riding in this area without the head restraints
installed are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 431.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
3 — Push To End Call
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s
view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
or off through Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Vanity Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
Outside Rearview Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying too
much on your passenger side mirror could cause
you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side mirror.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 62.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the door
panel next to the door handle.
Power Mirror Switch
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To
adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right)
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the
mirror to move.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
the center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active Ú page 431.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make
sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to
activate the device you are trying to program your
HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, refer to
the following steps:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure
as programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 54.
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code before beginning the
programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
of transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
US gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, refer to the following procedure. Be sure
to determine if the new device you want to program
the HomeLink® button to has a rolling code or a
non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
of transmission – which may not be long enough
for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people
or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted
the frequency signal. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the chan-
nels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note
that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security system is active.
NOTE:
The universal garage door opener only operates
when the engine is running for security reasons
associated with removable tops and doors.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel lights, interior lights, and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the
second detent for headlight, parking light, and
instrument panel light operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking lights and
instrument panel lights position to the first detent
to turn on headlights, parking lights, and
instrument panel lights. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for the AUTO position.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
not use a garage door opener without these
safety features.
WARNING!
1 — Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Fog Light Switch
1 — Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Fog Light Switch
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights are active when the
low beams are not on, and the engine is running.
DRLs may be deactivated by applying the parking
brake.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. The
lever will return to the centered position. To return
the headlights to low beam, pull the lever toward
the steering wheel, or push the lever toward the
instrument panel.
Multifunction Lever
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automatically controlling the high beams
through the use of a camera mounted on the
vehicle’s header. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle
is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
“Auto High Beam” within your Uconnect Settings
Ú page 207, as well as turning the headlight
switch to the AUTO position and placing the
multifunction lever in the high beam position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to
the last detent for automatic headlight operation.
When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will
stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch
out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are
left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound when the driver’s door
is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the
parking lights or low beam headlights and push the
fog light switch. Pushing the fog light switch a
second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
Front Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically turn
off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the dimmer controls
on the headlight switch fully upward, or, if
equipped, when the unlock button is pushed on
the key fob.
The interior courtesy lights are located in the
center of the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one
large center light and four smaller reading lights.
Each reading light can be turned on by pushing the
lens. Pushing the lens a second time will turn the
light off.
Dome Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom
position will cause all the interior lights to turn off.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
This allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s
battery.
DIMMER CONTROLS
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight
switch and are located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating
the left dimmer control will adjust the interior and
ambient light levels (e.g. courtesy lights in the
footwell, illuminated cupholders, and front door
handles).
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located at the end of the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Windshield Wiper/Washer Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever
upward to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate
the end of the lever to the first detent position for
one of four intermittent settings. The delay cycle
can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If
the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the delay range, the wiper will start and
continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles
after the lever is released. Then, the intermittent
interval previously selected will resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the
wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles.
Then, the wipers will turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the washer will resume normal
operation.
Mist
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single
wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. As long as the lever is held up, the wipers
will continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 368.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER — IF
E
QUIPPED
A rotary switch on the center portion of the
windshield wiper/washer lever controls the
operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
Rotate the switch upward to the first
detent position for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous
rear wiper operation.
Push the wiper lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear
washer. The washer pump and wiper will
continue to operate as long as the lever is
held.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the washer will resume normal
operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “park” position. When
the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will resume
function at whichever position the switch is set at.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park
position before turning off the engine. If the
wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to
the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may
occur when the vehicle is restarted.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate
Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX
A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance. The button illuminates when MAX
A/C is on. In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode
position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C to
turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is
on.
The A/C button allows the operator to manually
activate or deactivate the A/C system. When the
A/C system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets into the cabin.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
(Continued)
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press
and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed and air
distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active
during AUTO operation to improve performance.
AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency.
You can press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate,
to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates
when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause
the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic mode Ú page 67.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change the
current airflow setting to Defrost mode.
The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and
side window demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system returns to
the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Climate Control system.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION!
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
passenger temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the Climate Control
system. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either
the blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you
turn the blower control knob clockwise from the
lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. The blower
can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select one of the Mode buttons on the
touchscreen or press the Mode button on
the faceplate to adjust the airflow
distribution. The airflow distribution can
be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Manual Climate Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped
Set the temperature control knob to the
MAX A/C setting to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air.
Moving the temperature control knob
away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX
A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the recirculation button on the
faceplate to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
indicator (if equipped) illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if
equipped), the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turns off.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the Defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after 10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn
the temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn
the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Heater Only
Turning the temperature control knob clockwise
increases the heating temperature and turning the
temperature control knob counterclockwise
decreases the heating temperature.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Climate Control system.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
The blower speeds increase as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the
blower control knob to the OFF (O)
position.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 407.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they
could plug the water drains. In Winter months,
make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and
snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
comfort. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
The following chart is for Manual Override
Operation:
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute
to flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and
turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Glove Compartment
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower
storage compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, lift the
top latch. To access the lower storage
compartment, lift the bottom latch.
Console Storage Latches
Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The rear cargo area storage compartment is
located underneath the load floor.
To access the storage compartment, lift up on the
cargo strap at the rear of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Cover
USB/AUX C ONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel,
below the climate controls. Behind the media hub
access door, the Media Hub contains one AUX port,
a Type C USB port and one standard USB port. Both
USB ports allow you to play music from MP3
players, smartphones or USB devices through the
vehicle’s sound system.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in injury
in a collision.
1 — Upper Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Compartment Latch
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to Android Auto™ or Apple Carplay® Ú page 250
or in the Owner's Manual Supplement.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to
your device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned
off.
NOTE:
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it
will begin charging and is ready for use with the
system. Type C and Type A charge-only USB
ports can be used at the same time but cannot
be used simultaneously while playing media.
When both Type C and Type A charge-only USB
ports are in use they will be charged at a
reduced rate.
Both ports share a single data connection. The
user cannot switch between Type A or Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.
Media Hub
Located inside the center console, a second USB
port allows you to play music from USB devices
through your vehicle’s sound system.
Third and fourth USB ports (if equipped) are
located behind the center console, above the
power inverter. Both ports are charge only.
USB On The Back Of The Center Console
When a new device or smartphone is plugged into
the USB ports, the following message may display
depending on the device being utilized:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
the second device”.
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
1 — Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports
2 — Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power
outlets that can provide power for accessories
designed for use with the standard power outlet
adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of
the instrument panel below the climate controls,
and is powered from the ignition switch. Power is
available when the ignition switch is in the ON/
RUN or ACC position.
Front Power Outlet
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there
is a second power outlet located in the rear cargo
area and is powered directly from the vehicle’s
battery.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Power Outlets Fuse Locations
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
result in a collision.
1 — F43 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
(battery powered at all times)
2 — F45 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
(powered when the ignition switch is in the ON/
RUN or ACC position)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current.
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power
rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the
power inverter may have to be reset manually.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded,
the fuse protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause damage.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower switch
bank of the instrument panel can be used to power
various electrical devices. You have the ability to
configure the functionality of the auxiliary switches
via the Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
All switches can be configured as follows:
Switch type operation: Latching or Momentary
Power source: Battery or Ignition
Ability to hold last state across key cycles: On or
Off
Auxiliary Switches
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch
type is set to latching and power source is set to
ignition.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that
power four blunt cut wires. These wires are located
under the instrument panel in the passenger
compartment and under the hood to the right, near
the battery.
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a
fused battery wire and ignition wire are also
located in the interior, in the passenger side under
the instrument panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided
with the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/
installation of your electrical devices.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel)
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power window switches are located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls. Push
the switch downward to open the window and
upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window
and the top right switch controls the right front
window.
Power Window Switches
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after ignition is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear
passenger window, and the lower right switch
controls the right rear passenger window.
NOTE:
There are window switches located on the rear of
the center console for the rear passenger windows
in the four-door model.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power and the passenger door
power window switches have an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch down to the
second detent and release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch allows you to disable
the window controls on the rear passenger doors.
To disable the window controls, rotate the switch
downward. To enable the window controls, rotate
the switch upward.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down in certain open or partially
open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized by adjusting the window
opening.
WRANGLER TOPS
PROVIDED TOOLS
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with
your vehicle located in the center console. This kit
includes the necessary tools required for the
operations described in the following sections. All
pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use.
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used inde-
pendently. Your vehicle warranty will not cover
damage resulting from both tops being installed at
the same time.
Provided Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top (four
door models only), the soft top system will be
provided in a separate box located in the rear of
the vehicle for shipping purposes only.
LOWERING THE SOFT TOP INTO
S
UNRIDER ® POSITION
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
1 — Ratchet
2 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
3 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
4 — 15 mm Socket
WARNING!
The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are
designed only for protection against the
elements. Do not rely on them to contain occu-
pants within the vehicle or to protect against
injury during an accident. Remember, always
wear seat belts.
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all
pinch points when installing and removing the
soft tops. The lift assist mechanism and side
bows may cause serious injury if fingers or
hands get caught in between.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
(Continued)
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
the top has been folded down for a period of time,
the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise
it, making it difficult to put up. This is caused by a
natural contraction of the vinyl or acrylic materials
of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on
the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its
original size and the top can then be installed. If
the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not
attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side
curtains.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires,
building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or
luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a
structural member of the vehicle and, thus,
cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
CAUTION!
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic
car wash. Window scratches and wax buildup
may result.
Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may
result.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame, or fully lowered.
Do not fully lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may occur.
For important information on cleaning and
caring for your vehicle's fabric top
Ú page 409.
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry
or force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers
securing the soft top. Do not force or pry the
soft top framework when opening or closing.
Damage to the top may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on the
top material:
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the soft top
may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle's interior.
The soft top must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
CAUTION!
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four Door Side View Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5 — #5 Bow
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Two Door Side View Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5 — #5 Bow
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Two And Four Door Rear Components
1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE:
All lowering and raising the soft top instructions
are applicable to both two and four door model
vehicles.
Images shown are of four door models, and
appearance of two door model components
may differ.
The following options are available to you when
lowering your vehicle’s soft top:
Sunrider® position with rear and quarter
windows installed
Sunrider® position with rear and quarter panels
removed
Sunrider® position with rear window installed
and quarter panels removed
Fully lowered position with rear and quarter
windows removed
Both quarter windows should be removed and
installed together.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar
by pulling the handle downward. Make sure
the hook is disengaged from its receiver.
Step Two
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the
#1 Bow of the soft top to start the operation.
Step Three
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the
side link to fold the soft top rearward into the
Sunrider® position.
Step Four
NOTE:
If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider® position,
secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Step Four
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® posi-
tion with the rear window and quarter panel
assemblies fully installed or completely
removed.
The rear window and rear quarter windows must
be removed before fully lowering the soft top to
prevent damage to the top. Clean the side and
rear windows before removal to assist in
preventing scratching during removal of the soft
top. If the plastic retainers are difficult to
operate due to road dust, etc., clean them with
a mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning
products are available through an authorized
dealer.
Removing The Soft Top Windows
NOTE:
Before fully lowering the soft top, the rear window
and rear quarter windows must be removed.
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear
window’s plastic retainers from the lower
right and left corners.
Step One
2. Grab the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and
upward releasing it from both the right and left
retainers.
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
3. While holding the window in place, slide the
swing gate bar to the left separating it from the
rear window. Store in soft window bag (if
equipped), or a safe location.
Step Three
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both
quarter window pillars.
Step Four
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to
the left until it is completely separate from its
retainer. Do not pull downward while removing
the rear window. Damage to the retainer could
result.
Step Five
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom
corner outward and release tab from the
bottom of the window pillar.
Step One
2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at
the upper front corner of each quarter window.
Step Two
3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove
plastic retainer from along the bottom of the
window moving toward the front of the vehicle.
Step Three
4. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to the
top of the front window.
Step Four
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. While keeping the window level, slide rearward
until it is completely separate from its retainer.
Do not pull downward while removing the
window. Damage to the retainer could result.
Step Five
6. Store in soft window bag (if equipped) or a safe
location.
NOTE:
For information on the use of the storage bag, refer
to the next section.
Soft Top Window Storage Bag —
If Equipped
To safely store the soft top rear window, and rear
quarter windows, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
The swing gate bar, once removed from the rear
window, does not store in the soft window storage
bag (if equipped).
1. With the bag opened completely, fold both
fabric dividers downward and lay the first
quarter window all the way to the right side
with the inside of the window facing
downward and the window pillar to the
outside.
NOTE:
The quarter windows are marked “1” and “2” on
the inside of the window pillar.
Step One
Step One
2. Fold the first divider upward, covering the first
quarter window.
Step Two
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Both Dividers Folded Down
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
3. Lay the second quarter window on top of the
first divider all the way to the left side with the
inside of the window facing downward and the
window pillar to the outside.
Step Three
4. Fold the second divider upward, covering the
second quarter window.
Step Four
5. Lay the rear window on top of the second
divider.
Step Five
6. Close the storage bag and store in a safe
location.
Step Six
Lowering The Soft Top All The Way
1. Remove the rear window and quarter panel
windows
Ú
page 82.
2. From the Sunrider® position Ú page 76,
remove straps if previously secured and move
to the rear of the vehicle.
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Second Divider Folded Down
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Locate the Sunrider® latch beneath the #6
Bow of the soft top on the left side.
Step Three
4. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow the
soft top to slide rearward freely in the guide
tracks to the stowed position.
Step Four
5. While pushing downward slightly on the folded
soft top, slide the lock lever on the left and
right side lift assist mechanisms to the “lock”
position.
Step Five (Locked Position)
6. Once the lock lever is in the “lock” position,
push downward on each side of the folded soft
top to ensure it is secure. An audible “click”
may be heard.
Step Six
NOTE:
Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Step Six
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
RAISING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Raising The Soft Top From The
Fully Lowered Position
1. From the fully lowered
position, remove straps if
previously secured.
2. While pushing down on the rear of the top,
slide the lock lever on the left and right side lift
assist mechanisms to the “unlock” position.
Step Two
3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along
the guide track until it locks into the Sunrider®
position with an audible “click”.
Step Three
4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure
the top is locked in the Sunrider® position.
5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top
toward the front of the vehicle manually
guiding the top into the closed position.
Step Five
Step Five
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
1 — Unlocked Position
2 — #5 Bow Location
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the
header latch downward to engage the hook
into its receiver. Repeat on the other side.
Step Six
7. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing
the hook, locking the latch into place.
Step Seven
Installing The Soft Top Windows
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of
the window into the retainer and slide forward
while keeping the window level. Repeat on
the other side.
Step One
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into
the top cover, and insert the bottom tab into
the clip.
Step Two
Step Two
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install steps
could result in damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
3. Engage the retainers on the front of the
windows, ensuring they are fully engaged,
followed by the retainers along the bottom of
the windows.
Step Three
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
before the vehicle resumes motion.
4. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the
upper front corner of each quarter window by
pressing firmly.
Step Four
Install The Rear Window
1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from
left to right while keeping the window level.
Step One
2. Insert the swing gate bar into the retainers at
the bottom of the window from left to the right.
Step Two
3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right
side retainers.
Step Three
4. Line up the rear window to the right side
quarter window first, and engage the plastic
retainers.
1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window
2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Repeat with the left side quarter window.
Step Five
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower
right and left corners.
Step Six
NOTE:
For information on removing your soft top, refer to
the next section.
REMOVING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
1. Fully lower the soft top
Ú
page 85.
2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on both
the left and right sides are in the “lock”
position, and an audible “click” is heard when
pushing down on the #1 bow from each of the
lift assist mechanisms before removing.
Step Two
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head screws on
each lift assist mechanism, then lift the
mechanism up and away from the vehicle.
Step Three
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail
rearward to release the side link from the
track.
Step Four
Step Four
5. Repeat on the opposite side.
6. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and
away from the vehicle, careful to avoid the
vehicle’s sport bar, trim, and tire carrier. Store
the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry location.
Step Six
7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the Torx screw on both rear
corners of the vehicle, removing the retainers.
Step Seven
INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP
1. If currently installed, remove the hard top
Ú
page 97.
2. Install the door rails, starting with the front,
followed by the rear on each side. For
instructions and appropriate torque specifi-
cations for the door rail Torx screws
Ú page 107.
3. Install the rear retainers on each side of the
rear of the vehicle using the provided #50 Torx
head driver and ratchet. Refer to the following
table for recommended torque specifications.
Step Three
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx screws. Damage to the
retainers will occur.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in the
“lock” position, lift the soft top into the rear of
the vehicle with the side links pointing toward
the front. Lower the lift assist mechanisms
onto its retainers on both sides (on the inside
of the sport bar).
Step Four
Step Four
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, tighten the Torx screws by turning
them clockwise. Secure them until they are
snug (refer to the following table for
recommended torque specifications), being
careful not to cross-thread the screws or
overtighten. Repeat on the opposite side.
Step Five
Torque
Specification
For Torx Screw
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
Torque
Specification
For Torx
Screws
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
(Continued)
6. While pulling the release lever on the top of the
rail rearward, place the side link into the guide
track on the top of the rail then release the
lever.
Step Six
7. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This
cover should be discarded. It was intended as
a protective cover for shipping only.
8. Raise the soft top Ú page 87.
NOTE:
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the
top.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S) REMOVAL
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
CAUTION!
The hard top is not designed to carry any addi-
tional loads, such as after-market roof racks,
spare tires, building materials, hunting or
camping supplies, etc. For optional Mopar®
accessory roof racks Ú page 114.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the front header,
sport bar, and body side or fully removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to panel removal. Removing the
top, opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicle’s interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper installa-
tion can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
Careless handling and storage of the remov-
able roof panels may damage the seals,
causing water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-
rior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Two Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All hard top removal and installation instruc-
tions are applicable to both two and four door
model vehicles.
Images shown are of four door models, and
appearance of two door model components
may differ.
The left side panel must be removed before
removing the right side panel.
To remove the hard top front panel(s), proceed as
follows:
1. Fold down the sun visor against the
windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left side
panel (one at the front, the rear, and outside),
unlocking them from the roof.
Step Two
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch
located at the top of the windshield.
Step Three
4. Remove the left side panel.
5. Repeat the previous steps to remove the right
side panel.
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag — If
Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you to
store your hard top panels. The storage bag
contains two compartments.
Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down so
the loops and hooks are facing upward. Unzip the
bag and fold back the outer flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to
inserting the panel into the panels bag.
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the bag
with the latches facing upward.
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the
divider is lying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into
the bag with the latches facing downward.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to
inserting the panel into the bag.
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top bag
closed.
Step Four
1 — Header Panel Latched
2 — Unlatched Position
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
5. Lift the Freedom Top bag into the vehicle with
the hooks and straps facing the back of the
rear seat. Attach the clip at the bottom of the
bag to the child restraint anchorage, located at
the base of the rear seat.
6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head
restraints and loop the strap through the
buckle. Pull on the strap to tighten the
Freedom Top bag securely against the rear
seat.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S)
I
NSTALLATION
1. Open the header latch inside the vehicle, and
the three L-shaped locks on each panel.
2. Set the right side panel on the windshield
frame with the locating pin in the front receiver
mounting hole followed by the left side panel,
making sure there is no overhang. Also, make
sure that the panels are sitting flush with the
body.
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for
removal in reverse order.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top
panels should be clear of any dust and debris prior
to reinstallation.
REMOVING THE HARD TOP
1. Remove both front panels
Ú
page 93.
2. Open both front doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, remove the two Torx head screws that
secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top
of the front doors).
Step Three
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure
the hard top to the vehicle (along the interior
bodyside — three screws on each side) using
the #50 Torx head driver.
Step Four
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure
clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the
rear window glass.
Step Five
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on
the left rear inside corner of the vehicle.
Step Six
7. Release the locking tab by pushing it
downward.
Step Seven
8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab
inward while pulling downward to disconnect.
Step Eight
Step Eight
9. To remove the washer hose, push the release
button on hose connector, and pull downward.
Step Nine
10. Secure the wire harness to the body side by
plugging it into the receptacle and reengaging
the locking tab.
Step Ten
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
11. Secure the washer hose by snapping it into the
top of the body side receptacle.
Step Eleven
Step Eleven
12. Lower the rear window, and close the swing
gate.
13. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place
the hard top on a soft surface to prevent
damage.
INSTALLING THE HARD TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top
usage, they must be removed prior to installation
of the hard top. For removal procedures, see
Ú page 106.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the
vehicle while making sure that the top is sitting
flush with the body at the sides and check to
ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift
glass and hard top. Then follow the removal steps
in reverse order.
NOTE:
Inspect the hard top seals for damage and
replace if necessary.
The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to
the body should be torqued as follows using the
provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet:
Hard top to B-pillar: 119 in-lb +/- 23 in-lb
(13.5 N·m +/- 2.7 N·m)
Hard top to J-rail: 154 in-lb +/- 30 in-lb
(17.5 N·m +/- 3.5 N·m)
SUNRIDER ® FOR HARD TOP
The Sunrider® soft top can be used in place of the
Hard Top Freedom Panels for quick and easy
opening of the area above the driver and front
passenger seats.
CAUTION!
The removal of the rear Hard Top requires four
adults, one located on each corner. Failure to
follow this caution could damage the Hard Top.
WARNING!
Do not open or close the Sunrider® top while
driving. Operating the top while driving could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sunrider® For Hard Top
To install the Sunrider® soft top, proceed as
follows:
1. Remove both front Hard Top Freedom panels
Ú
page 93.
2. With the help of a second person, set the
Sunrider® top onto the top of the vehicle
making sure to align the holes at the front and
rear of the side rails.
Lower Sunrider® Onto The Vehicle
3. Swing the front frame bracket around the side
of the rail, and insert the door rail attachment
bolt (provided bolt without spacer) from
underneath. Tighten with a #40 Torx head
driver until snug.
Attach Front Door Rail Bolt
4. Insert the rear door rail attachment bolt
(provided bolt with spacer) from underneath.
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until snug.
Attach Rear Door Rail Bolt
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 on the other side of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the
front and rear door rail attachment bolts is 8.8 ft-lb
(12 N·m).
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
6. Attach the rear clamp at the rear center of the
Sunrider® top using the two provided rear
clamp attachment bolts. Tighten with #40 Torx
head driver until snug.
Rear Clamp Location
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the rear
clamp attachment bolts is 3.7 ft-lb (5 N·m).
7. From inside the vehicle, lift and pull the
Sunrider® top forward using the integrated
handle on the front header of the top.
Manually guide the top into the closed
position.
Push Sunrider® Top Forward
8. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the
header latch downward to engage the hook
into its receiver. Pull the handle back upward
while squeezing the hook, locking the latch
into place. Repeat on the other side.
Engage Both Header Latches
To Open The Sunrider® Top
To open the Sunrider® top, proceed as follows:
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar
by pulling the handle downward. Make sure
the hook is disengaged from its receiver.
Release Both Header Latches
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. From the front of the Sunrider® top, lift and
push the top rearward to the Sunrider®
position.
Sunrider® Position
4. Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided with the Sunrider® kit, and
wrap one around the side rails on each side of
the Sunrider® top to hold it in place.
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Placement
POWER SLIDING TOP — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding
Top, the control switch can be found on the front
trim panel, to the right of the driver’s side sun visor.
Power Sliding Top Control Switch
NOTE:
The power top is non-removable. If desired, the
rear quarter windows can be removed and
stored in the provided storage bag Ú page 104.
The power top will not open in temperatures
below -4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened at a
higher temperature, it can be closed at
temperatures above -40°F (-40°C).
The power top will not operate at vehicle speeds
above 60 mph (96 km/h).
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT
recommended in vehicles equipped with a
Power Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the top
as well as the header seal.
1 — Open Switch
2 — Close Switch
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
NOTE:
A slight pause in audio may be heard when
opening and closing the Power Sliding Top as a
result of the Uconnect system switching between
power top Closed and power top Open audio
modes.
Opening And Closing The Power Top
Express Open/Close
Push the open switch and release it within one-half
second and the power top will open automatically
from any position. The power top will open fully and
stop automatically.
Push the close switch and release it within one-half
second and the power top will close automatically
from any position. The power top will close fully and
stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the power top switch will
stop the power top.
Manual Open/Close
To open the power top manually, push and hold the
open switch to the full open position, then release.
To close the power top manually, push and hold
the close switch to the fully closed position, then
release.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the power top movement. The
top will remain in a partially opened position until
the switch is operated and held again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the power top during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
power top is detected, the power top will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs. Next, push the close switch and
release to Express Close.
NOTE:
The Power Sliding Top may reverse motion if
closing during a severe headwind. If this occurs,
push and hold the Power Sliding Top switch
again to close the top completely.
If three consecutive power top close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the power top must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Power Top Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the quarter window glass panel. For
important information on cleaning and caring for
your vehicle Ú page 408.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power top while operating the power
top switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open power top.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
power top. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the power top opening. Injury may result.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the power
top is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be
sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all
objects from the top’s path before closing.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
The power top switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to
the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 207.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is a
relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the
power top when the “Express Mode” stops
working. To reset the power top, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and
start the vehicle.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to perform the relearn
procedure.
2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed
position.
3. Push and hold the Close switch for
10 seconds. This will put the power top
into calibration mode.
4. Continue holding down the close button while
the top goes fully open and then back to fully
close.
5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully
closed position, release the close button. The
power top is now reset and ready to use.
NOTE:
If the close button is released anytime during the
relearning process, the relearn may not be
complete, and the procedure must be repeated.
Rear Quarter Window Removal
On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the
rear quarter windows can be removed. To remove
these windows, follow this procedure:
1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear window.
2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter
windows.
3. Locate the rear quarter window latches (two on
each window) on the interior of the windows.
4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwise to
release.
5. Rotate the right hand side latch counter-
clockwise to release.
Step Five
1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise
2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each
window upward and away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not pull down or apply any weight to the
windows after the latches are released. Damage
could result to the pins holding the windows in
place.
Step Six
Step Six
7. Store the rear quarter windows in the provided
storage bag and keep in a safe location, or
securely fasten the bag to the rear seat.
Quarter Window Storage Bag
To use the storage bags for the rear quarter
windows, proceed as follows:
1. With the bag completely open and the fabric
divider raised, place the first quarter window
with the latches facing outward into the foam
insert. Fold divider over the window once
placed inside.
Step One
1 — Bag Open With Divider Raised
2 — Lower Divider Over Window
(Latches Facing Outward)
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the second window into the foam insert
with the latches facing outward. Fully close the
bag.
NOTE:
Once both windows are placed inside the bag, the
outside of the windows will be facing each other
with all latches facing the outside of the bag.
Step Two
3. Store the bag in a safe location, or in the cargo
area of the vehicle by securing the bag in the
vehicle’s cargo area. This is done by attaching
the straps at the top of the bag to the rear
head restraints, as well as attaching the clip at
the bottom of the bag to the forward most
cargo hook on the load floor.
Step Three
DOOR FRAME
1 — Second Window Placed Over Divider
2 — Fully Closed Bag
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This proce-
dure is furnished for use during off-road oper-
ation only.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the protec-
tion that they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation
only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
Opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the remov-
able door frame(s) may damage the seals,
causing water to leak into the vehicle's inte-
rior.
The door frame(s) must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
NOTE:
In four door models, the rear door frames must be
removed first, followed by the front door frames.
1. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, loosen the Torx screws located on the
underside of each door frame (two per door).
Door Frame Screw Locations
2. Once all the way loosened, remove the screws
by pulling downward.
NOTE:
Screws will not fall out once completely loose, as
they are held in place by an internal mechanism.
Remove Screws From Below Frame
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the
vehicle.
Step Three
4. Store screws in a secure location.
5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame
(four door models).
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION FOUR
D
OOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Install the front door rail first.
2. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber
seal at the top of the windshield, and line up
the holes for the Torx head screws (two for
each door).
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This proce-
dure is furnished for use during off-road oper-
ation only.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the protec-
tion that they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation
only.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the
rail, and insert the screws from underneath.
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they
are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the
screws or overtighten. Refer to the following
table for the appropriate torque specifications
for the door rail screws.
Step Three
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top
of the body side, just behind the rear door
opening.
Step Four
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame
onto the rear of the front door rail, making sure
rubber seals lie flat. Ensure the seals are
installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
Position Of Frame Above Door
Target Torque
Specification
For Torx
Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lb
(9 N·m)
87.6 in-lb
(9.9 N·m)
71.7 in-lb
(8.1 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
1 — Front Door Rail
2 — Rear Door Frame
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the
rail, and insert the screws from underneath.
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they
are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the
screws or overtighten. Refer to the previous
table for the appropriate torque specifications
for the door rail screws.
Step Six
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION TWO DOOR
M
ODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber
seal at the top of the windshield, and line up
the holes for the Torx head screws (two for
each door).
2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the
rail, and insert the screws from underneath.
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they
are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the
screws or overtighten. Refer to the following
table for the appropriate torque specifications
for the door rail screws.
Step Two
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a
structural element that can provide some
protection in some accidents. The windshield also
provides some protection against weather, road
debris and intrusion of small branches and other
objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down, as you lose the protection this
structural element can provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield
can be folded down. However, the protection
afforded by the windshield is then lost. If you fold
down the windshield, drive slowly and cautiously. It
is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be
limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with low range
operation preferred if you are driving off-road with
the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that
required its removal is completed and before you
return to on-road driving. Both you and your
Target Torque
Specification
For Torx
Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lb
(9 N·m)
87.6 in-lb
(9.9 N·m)
71.7 in-lb
(8.1 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT
recommended in vehicles equipped with a
Power Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the top
as well as the header seal.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
passengers should wear seat belts at all times,
on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the
windshield is raised or folded down.
LOWERING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Before completing the following steps:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top,
the top MUST be lowered, and the door rails
must be removed prior to lowering the wind-
shield.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top,
the Freedom Panels MUST be removed
prior to lowering the windshield.
Refer to the following instructions for more
information:
• Soft Top Lowering
Ú page 85
• Door Frame
Ú page 106
• Freedom Top Panels Ú page 93
2. Manually remove the protective caps over the
windshield wiper hex bolts.
Step Two
3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the
two hex bolts and remove the wiper arms.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower
both sun visors.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal injury:
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind-
shield is securely fastened, either up or down.
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be
worn at all times when the windshield is down.
Be sure that you carefully follow the instruc-
tions for raising the windshield. Make sure
that the folding windshield, windshield wipers,
side bars, and all associated hardware and
fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled
before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow
these instructions may prevent your vehicle
from providing you and your passengers’
protection in some accidents.
If you remove the doors, store them outside
the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a
loose door may cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage to
the vehicle’s header seal.
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver,
remove the four Torx screws located along the
interior of the windshield.
Step Five
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts
the tie-down bumpers (if equipped).
Step Six
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the tie-down on either side of the hood
and on the windshield frame. Tighten the strap
to secure the windshield in place.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor Protective
Cover — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective
cover that is to be used whenever the windshield is
folded down in order to protect the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)/Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
sensor. To install the cover, follow these
instructions:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it
hinges to the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it
covers the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured
properly.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning the
windshield to the normal position. Store the cover
in the cargo area.
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can
accumulate in the cover and block the camera
lens. Use a microfiber cloth to clean the camera
lens, module, and inside cover, being careful not to
damage or scratch the module.
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Tie-Down
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield
could result.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAISING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield
in the lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver,
reinstall the four Torx screws located along the
interior of the windshield. Secure them until
they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Interior Torx Screw Locations
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the
provided 15 mm socket. First, align the tips of
the blade to the “T” mark in the glass. Then,
while holding the arm in that position, reinstall
the hex nut and tighten until snug. Be careful
not to overtighten. Repeat for the other arm.
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper
arm hex bolts and push gently until they snap
into place.
Step Five
6. After completing the steps above:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top,
reinstall the Door Rails and raise the top.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top,
reinstall the Freedom Panels.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
Release both of the outside hood latches.
Raise the hood slightly, and place a hand
palm-side down in the center of the hood opening.
Locate the safety latch in the middle, and push the
latch to the right to open.
Place Hand In Hood Opening
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Hood Latch Locations
Remove the support rod from the hood, and insert
it into the radiator crossmember.
NOTE:
You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
CLOSING THE HOOD
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the
slot and replace it on the hood panel retaining clip.
Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood
latches.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using one
of the following methods:
Mechanical key (with mechanical lock — if
equipped)
Remote Keyless Entry key fob (if equipped)
Power door unlock switch on the front doors (if
equipped)
Passive Entry swing gate handle (if equipped)
To open the swing gate, pull on the handle.
Swing Gate Handle
NOTE:
Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to
close the swing gate (hard top models only).
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it.
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by these
fumes. Keep the flip-up window closed when you
are operating the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing
the rear flip-up window, as damage to the blade
will result.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The swing gate hinges and check strap may require
cleaning if a squeak can be heard when opening
the swing gate. Progressive accumulation of dirt or
debris on the check strap arm may cause failure of
the check strap, requiring replacement. For further
information on vehicle cleaning procedures, see
Ú page 411.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trail Rail Cargo Organizer — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trail Rail
system, a rail will be found built into the floor on
either side of the cargo area. Each rail contains an
adjustable anchor loop that can be used to secure
cargo. The position of the adjustable anchor loop
can be adjusted by sliding the loop along the rail.
To adjust the anchor loop, push down on the center
button while sliding the loop along the rail to the
desired position. Release the button and move the
loop slightly to the next fixed position in the
notches of the rail.
Adjustable Anchor Loop
Lift the loop to use.
Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models
ONLY.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lb (45 kg), this
includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo
is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle,
plus the load on the luggage rack, do not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
in personal injury or property damage. Follow
the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is recommended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to the
cargo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to crossbars first, with tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary
tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
2
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display Ú page 120.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
filler door is located.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will
occur.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu items.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a Main
Menu item. Push and hold the OK arrow button
for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
OIL CHANGE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instrument
cluster display for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
and release the OK button. To reset the oil change
indicator system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the
engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info"
in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view
the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the OK button to toggle between MPH
and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus and push and
release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
Speedometer
Driver Assist —
If Equipped
Stop/Start
Vehicle Info Fuel Economy Audio
Off Road Trip Info Messages
Screen Setup Settings
Phone Call
Status
Tire Pressure
Single Gauge
Submenu — If
Equipped
Critical Level
Logic — If
Equipped
Oil Life
Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Level — If
Equipped
Coolant
Temperature
Oil Pressure
Oil
Temperature
Transmission
Temperature —
Automatic
Transmission
Only
Battery
Voltage
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Off Road
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical
and numerical value of calculated average
front wheel angle from the steering wheel
orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High
Part Time, 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If
Equipped): displays front and rear or rear
only axle locker graphic, and sway bar
connection graphic with text message
(connected or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in
the graphic with the angle number on the
screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display
the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the
numbers, and the graphic will be greyed out. A
message indicating the necessary speed for the
feature to become available will also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the
ACC systems.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature —
If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
ACC system settings. The information displayed
depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following displays
in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the
steering wheel), and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity Ú page 171.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset average fuel economy feature.
Toggle left or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range
value is less than 10 miles (16 kilometers), the
Range display will change to a “LOW” message.
Adding a significant amount of fuel to the
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message and a
new Range value will display. Range cannot be
reset through the OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the
last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display, then push and release
the left or right arrow button to select Trip A
or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. The screen will
display the Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This
menu will display the audio source information,
including the Song name, Artist name, and audio
source with an accompanying graphic.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the right
arrow button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
When no messages are present, a “No Stored
Messages” will display.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the OK button to enter the submenus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left and Right
None
Current Econ
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Average Econ
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Outside Temp Compass Trip A Distance
Range To
Empty
Time Trip B Distance
Center
None Compass Time
Outside Temp
Average Econ
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Trip A Distance
Range to
Empty
Audio Speedometer
Current Econ
(or L/100km,
km/L)
Trip B Distance Menu Title
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Gear Display — If Equipped
Full
Single
Current Gear — If Equipped
On
Off
Odometer — If Equipped
Show
Hide
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Cancel
Restore
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press
OK button to choose show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Phone Call Status
A pop-up message for an incoming call will appear
on any screen within your instrument cluster. The
pop-up message will appear on your screen until it
is cleared out of the call is ignored, answered, or
the calling ends.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Settings can be programmed to turn
the pop-up off. This will not affect the audio menu
or any phone status information Ú page 207.
Any incoming calls, active calls, and outgoing calls
will take the place of your audio information.
A caller’s name will only be displayed if:
A number is associated with the call. The phone
number will be displayed in place of the caller’s
name.
The test/font of the name is not supported by
the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster
will not display anything in place of the name.
The caller’s name exceeds the maximum
number of characters. The last two to three
digits that will fit will be replaced with “...”.
NOTE:
Any audio information will return to the instrument
cluster once the call has ended.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Stop/Start Vehicle Info
Off Road – If
Equipped
(show/hide)
Messages
Driver Assist –
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Settings
Trip Info
(Show/Hide)
Audio (show/
hide)
Screen Setup
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
Ú page 129.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of the charging system. The charging system is
still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volt,
150W, USB ports) during certain driving condi-
tions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volt, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
DIESEL DISPLAYS
When the appropriate conditions exist, the
following messages display in the instrument
cluster display:
Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at
Consistent Speeds to Clear
Exhaust Filter Full – Power Reduced See Dealer
Exhaust System Service Required – See Dealer
Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service
Required See Dealer
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process
Continue Driving
Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
M
ESSAGES
This engine meets all required diesel engine
emissions standards. To achieve these emissions
standards, your vehicle is equipped with a
state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These
systems are seamlessly integrated into your
vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine
combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst
to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your vehicle or
engine. Refer to the following messages that may
be displayed on your instrument cluster display:
Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at
Consistent Speeds to Clear — This message will
be displayed if the exhaust particulate filter
reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity.
Under conditions of exclusive short duration
and low speed driving cycles, your diesel engine
and exhaust after-treatment system may never
reach the conditions required to cleanse the
filter to remove the trapped PM. If this occurs,
the “Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
Highway Speeds to Remedy” message will be
displayed. If this message is displayed, you will
hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this
condition. By simply driving your vehicle at
highway speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can
remedy the condition in the particulate filter
system and allow your diesel engine and
exhaust after-treatment system to cleanse the
filter to remove the trapped PM and restore the
system to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process
Continue Driving — This message indicates that
the DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain your current
driving condition until regeneration is
completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed —
This message indicates that the DPF
self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust System Service Required —
See Dealer — This messages indicates regener-
ation has been disabled due to a system
malfunction. At this point the engine Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) will register a fault code,
the instrument panel will display a Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL).
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or oper-
ate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust sys-
tem can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The engine may be switched off even if the warn-
ing light is on: repeated interruptions of the
regeneration process could cause an early dete-
rioration of engine oil. For this reason it is always
advisable to wait for the symbol to go off before
turning off the engine, following the instructions
above. Do not complete the DPF regeneration
process when the vehicle is stopped.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with continued
operation.
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced
See Dealer — This message indicates the PCM
has derated the engine to limit the likelihood of
permanent damage to the after-treatment
system. If this condition is not corrected and a
dealer service is not performed, extensive
exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To
correct this condition it will be necessary to have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing
your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by
0 miles (0 kilometers) remaining will prevent the
diesel exhaust filter from performing its cleaning
routine. This will shortly result in a Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced engine power.
Only an authorized dealer will be able to correct
this condition.
FUEL SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following chart contains a list of different
messages that may appear in the instrument
cluster, depending on different system or fuel
conditions. Use the descriptions to interpret what
the message means and determine the best action
to take.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional
and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is not on during startup,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with continued
operation.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS is
required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 164.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool,
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 341.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate, and a
chime will sound, to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light and chime turn on
while driving, safely stop the vehicle and
turn off the engine as soon as possible. After the
vehicle is safely stopped, restart the engine and
monitor the Oil Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil
Pressure Warning Light is still illuminated, turn the
engine OFF and contact an authorized dealer for
further assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until
the cause is corrected. If the lamp is no longer
illuminated, the engine can be operated but it is
recommended to take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound Ú page 295.
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
swing gate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
Vehicle Security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is
Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire. If you continue to
operate the vehicle when the “CLUTCH HOT”
message is displayed, or the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light is illuminated, you
could cause the clutch to overheat and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure. If you continue to
operate the vehicle when the “CLUTCH HOT”
message is displayed, or the Transmission
Temperate Warning Light is illuminated, you
could cause the clutch to overheat and cause
severe clutch damage, transmission damage, or
failure.
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system
will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the
filler cap to disengage the light. If the
light does not turn off, please see an
authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light
will turn on and a chime will sound. The
light will remain on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 355.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The MIL is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the
bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate along
with a dedicated message on the display
(if equipped) if an unknown fluid not
conforming with acceptable
characteristics is inserted, or if an average
consumption of AdBlue® (UREA) over 50% is
detected. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flam-
mable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or seri-
ous injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy
and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe cata-
lytic converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
If the problem is not solved, a specific message will
appear on the instrument cluster display whenever
a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer
be possible to start the engine.
When about 125 miles (200 km) are remaining
before the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a
continuous dedicated message will appear on the
instrument panel, accompanied by a chime.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service Ú page 288.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a
fault in the sway bar disconnect system
Ú page 162.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a
fault in the sway bar disconnect system
Ú page 162.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front sway bar is disconnected
Ú page 162.
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode,
and the front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
increased torque at the wheels Ú page 157.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive part time mode,
and the front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front and/or
rear axle locker fault has been detected.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off
Ú page 288.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front, rear,
or both axles have been locked. The
telltale will display the lock icon on the
front and rear axles to indicate the
current lock status.
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the neutral mode.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated Ú page 157.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service
Ú page 171.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front sway bar is disconnected
Ú page 162.
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
Its duration may be longer based on
colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate
start until telltale is no longer displayed
Ú page 139.
NOTE:
The Wait To Start Light may not illuminate if the
intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue®
(UREA) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions
Additive AdBlue® (UREA) indicator light
illuminates when the AdBlue® (UREA)
level is low.
Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible
with at least 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of AdBlue®
(UREA).
If filling the tank is done with a remaining range of
AdBlue® (UREA) in the tank equal to zero, you may
need to wait two minutes before starting the
vehicle.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will
illuminate when there is water detected
in the fuel filter. If this light remains on,
DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain
the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine
damage, and please see an authorized dealer.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and there is no
vehicle in front detected Ú page 171.
CAUTION!
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit
may cause severe damage to the injection
system and irregular engine operation. If the
indicator light is illuminated, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to bleed
the system. If the above indications come on
immediately after refuelling, water, or AdBlue®
UREA has probably been poured into the tank:
switch the engine off immediately and contact
an authorized dealer.
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
a vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 171.
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive auto mode. The
system will provide power to all four
wheels and shift the power between the
front and rear axles as needed. This will provide
maximum traction in dry and slippery conditions.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Cruise Control is set to the desired
speed Ú page 169.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 57.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on,
but not set.
2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
With a Premium Instrument Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the two-wheel drive high mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the
4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec-Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”,
ensure the vehicle is in 4WD Low and push the
button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
(Continued)
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not set.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Cruise Control is set.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not set.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 207.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
3
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the I/M
test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
WARNING!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
139
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before
starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a
clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start
unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will
start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor. This feature enhances
off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to
start when in 4L without having to press the clutch
pedal. The 4L Indicator Light will illuminate when
the transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK
position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL).
Apply the brake before shifting to any driving
range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
erator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle
stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button
is pushed once, the transmission will automat-
ically select PARK and the engine will turn off
while the ignition will remain in the ACC
position (NOT the OFF position). Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pushing the START/STOP button once will turn
the engine off. The ignition will remain in the
ACC position.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds (or three short pushes in a
row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC position (NOT the OFF
position) if the engine is turned off when the
transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the
ignition will cycle to the OFF position after
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in the
ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the
transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,
ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition positions
without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC position
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
position (instrument cluster will display “ON/
RUN”).
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations
on the following pages occur. It is a back-up system
and should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into
PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmis-
sion
Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is
removed and the driver is not on the seat (seat
pad sensor detects driver missing)
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and on the gear
selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your
vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precau-
tion, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back-up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition is switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC position.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmis-
sion
Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is
removed and the driver is not on the seat (seat
pad sensor detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases,
the gear selector must be returned to “P” to select
desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
4L
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4L.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when
both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
the battery to ensure a full battery charge
during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and
release it when the engine starts.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A
vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool,
then repeat the “Extended Park Starting”
procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather”
procedure, and the vehicle has not experience an
extended park condition, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
10 to 15 seconds. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the
ignition in the RUN position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically and will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to 25-second
intervals. Waiting two minutes between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 338.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
10 to 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
Always make sure the ignition is in the OFF
position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
NOTE:
Engine start up in very low ambient temperature
could result in evident white smoke. This condition
will disappear as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission gear
selector in the PARK (P) position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The cartridge block heater clips into the engine
block near the water jacket and transfers heat to
the coolant. It requires a 110–115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord. Its use is recommended for
environments that routinely fall below -10°F
(-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has not
been running overnight or longer periods and
should be plugged in for two hours prior to start. Its
use is required for cold starts with temperatures
under -20°F (-28°C).
NOTE:
The engine block heater and heater cord are
factory-installed options. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater and heater cords are available
from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housing
aids in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by
a built-in thermostat.
A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves engine
starting and reduces the amount of white
smoke generated by a warming engine.
NORMAL STARTING
Observe the instrument cluster lights when
starting the engine.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
erator pedal.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
NOTE:
A delay of the start of up to five seconds is possible
under very cold conditions. The Wait to Start
telltale will be illuminated during the preheat
process. When the engine Wait To Start telltale
goes off the engine will automatically crank.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
The engine is allowed to crank as long as 25
seconds. If the engine fails to start during this
period, please wait at least two minutes for
the starter to cool before repeating start
procedure.
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
damage Ú page 362.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. The system will automatically engage the
starter to crank the engine. If the vehicle fails
to start, the starter will disengage automat-
ically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button again.
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has
turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating
system. If the instructions in this manual are
followed, the engine should start in all conditions
and no type of starting fluid should be used.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the diesel engine is
operating:
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
Voltmeter operation.
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This is caused by the
glow plug heating system. The number of cycles
and the length of the cycling operation is controlled
by the engine control module. Glow plug heater
operation can run for several minutes. Once the
heater operation is complete, the voltmeter needle
will stabilize.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
damage Ú page 362.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F
(0°C) may require special considerations. The
following charts suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where
extended arctic conditions 0°F (-18°C) exist.
NOTE:
Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number 1 ULSD
Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel
economy.
Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number 2
ULSD Fuel and Number 1 ULSD Fuel which
reduces the temperature at which wax crystals
form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the
pump at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel Fuel. Use of incorrect fuel could result in
engine and exhaust system damage
Ú page 420.
If climatized or Number 1 ULSD Fuel is not avail-
able, and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C),
in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar®
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent)
is recommended to avoid gelling (see Fuel Oper-
ating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
See Engine Fluids and Lubricants for the correct
engine oil viscosity Ú page 424.
Winter Front Cover
A Winter front or cold weather cover can be used in
ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C),
especially during extended idle conditions. This
cover is equipped with four flaps for managing
total grille opening in varying ambient
temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
cover is to be used, the flaps should be in the full
open position to allow air flow to the cooling
module and automatic transmission oil cooler.
When ambient temperatures drop below 0°F
(-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A suitable
cold weather cover is available from a Mopar®
dealer.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine
up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil
pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the
engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before
full loads are applied.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may
be harmful to your engine because combustion
chamber temperatures can drop so low that the
fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete
combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on
piston rings, cylinder head valves, and injector
nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the
crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear
to the engine.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
STOPPING THE ENGINE
After full load operation, idle the engine for a few minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat
away from the turbocharger.
NOTE:
Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown.
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the engine fan will run
after the engine is turned off. These conditions are
under high load and high temperature conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS — AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
To reduce the potential for engine and
transmission overheating in high ambient
temperature conditions, take the following actions:
City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL (N) and increase engine idle
speed.
Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission
gear.
Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
NOTE:
If the coolant temperature is too high, the A/C will
automatically turn off.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
If the Oil Pressure Warning Light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut down the engine
as soon as possible. A chime will sound when the
light turns on. After the vehicle is safely stopped,
restart the engine and monitor the Oil Pressure
Warning Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning Light is
still illuminated, turn the engine OFF and contact
an authorized dealer for further assistance. If the
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
lamp is no longer illuminated, the engine can be
operated but it is recommended to take the vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not show how much oil is
in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the
parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in
performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the
engine requires service. Some important clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
Sudden loss of power
Unusual engine noises
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks
Sudden change, outside the normal operating
range, in the engine operating temperature
Excessive smoke
Oil pressure drop
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 424.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
The diesel engine does not require a break-in
period due to its construction. Normal operation is
allowed, providing the following recommendations
are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to
prevent engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature
indicators.
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings,
shut the engine off immediately. Failure to do so
could result in immediate and severe engine
damage.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds when
carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or
no load operation will extend the time before the
engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy
and power may be seen at this time.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For recommended viscosity and quality
grades see Ú page 424. NON-DETERGENT OR
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or
manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever
up as firmly as possible. To release the parking
brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center
button, then lower the lever completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the auto-
matic transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For
vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
apply the parking brake before placing the gear
selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position on an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking
brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
(Continued)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmission
fluid warms up. This is normal.
Transmission Gear Selector
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and
place the gear selector into the desired gear
position (the diagram for the engagement of the
gears is displayed on the handle of the selector).
The engaged gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, a manual
transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on or
partially depressing the clutch pedal. Never
attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged. Operating
vehicle in this manner may cause the clutch to
overheat and cause permanent damage to
the clutch. If you continue to operate the
vehicle in this manner, the “CLUTCH HOT”
message or Transmission Temperature
Warning Light will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. For more information
Ú page 128.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear
selector as the force exerted, even if slight,
could lead over time to premature wear of the
gearbox internal components.
CAUTION!
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the
knob and move the gear selector all the way left
and then forward.
Shift Pattern
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears.
As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the
accelerator pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting
from a standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when
the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch
engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be
heard when driving. The noise may also be more
noticeable when the transmission is warm. This
noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift
at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only. Vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
(Continued)
(Continued)
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the
right time provides better acceleration when you
desire to resume speed. Downshift progressively.
Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine
and clutch.
NOTE:
The manual transmission shift system is equipped
with gear blockers, which will prevent downshifts
into FIRST or SECOND gear above certain vehicle
speeds.
Maximum Recommended Downshift
Speeds
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be
significantly less.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower
gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage
the engine and clutch systems. Any attempt to
shift into lower gear with clutch pedal pressed
may result damage to the clutch system.
Shifting into lower gear and releasing the
clutch may result in engine damage.
When descending a hill, be very careful to
downshift one gear at a time to prevent over-
speeding the engine which can cause engine
damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the
clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in
low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine
and clutch damage are significantly lower.
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine
damage and/or damage the clutch, even if the
clutch pedal is pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch
pedal pressed could result in clutch damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine to
overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even
if the clutch pedal is pressed.
CAUTION!
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in
MPH (KM/H)
Gear
Selection
6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum
Speed
80
(129)
70
(113)
50
(81)
30
(48)
15
(24)
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
position. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
position) before exiting the vehicle.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The
brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8–SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed
both beside the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, push
the lock button on the gear selector and move the
selector rearward or forward. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear
in the instrument cluster Ú page 156.
Transmission Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button
on the gear selector and firmly move the gear
selector all the way forward until it stops and is
fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears. The DRIVE position should be used
for all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 156. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of
transmission shifting also known as AutoStick
mode. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position will manually select the transmission gear,
and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster Ú page 156.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 198.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 344.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance. This feature can also provide
you with more control during passing, city driving,
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will
be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick
mode, you can use the gear selector (in the
MANUAL position) to manually shift the
transmission.
AutoStick mode has the following operational
benefits:
The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the trans-
mission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range).
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND or THIRD
gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will
downshift the transmission to the lowest gear
possible at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is
not active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or
out of the AutoStick position at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
FOUR-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides four positions:
2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range
4H — Four-Wheel Drive High Range
N (Neutral)
4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each transfer case position, see the following:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 198.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage or
loss of power and vehicle control. You could have
a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the
transfer case is fully engaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
(N) Neutral position disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic
transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission
is in gear). The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to
the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions,
such as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to
lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended
for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components. For further information on shifting
into 4H or 4L Ú page 158.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light will
illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into
the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed will be approximately three times (four times
for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H OR 4H TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting
speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the
accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not
accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a
constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the
shift to take place. Shifting while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage
to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transfer case
fluid warms up. This is normal.
4H TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h),
shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N),
or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
While the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to
5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the
desired position. Do not pause with the transfer
case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed,
place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 1 to
3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage
or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster
than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transfer case
fluid warms up. This is normal.
FIVE-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides five mode positions:
2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range
4H AUTO — Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range
4H PART TIME — Four-Wheel Drive Part Time
High Range
N (Neutral)
4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each transfer case mode position, see the
following:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range
sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel
drive system will be automatically engaged when
the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional
traction for varying road conditions.
4H PART TIME
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This
range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used
for flat towing behind another vehicle Ú page 198.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to
the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in the
two-wheel drive position (2H) or four-wheel drive
position (4H AUTO) for normal street and highway
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage or
loss of power and vehicle control. You could have
a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the
transfer case is fully engaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
(N) Neutral position disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic
transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission
is in gear). The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
conditions on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving the
vehicle in 2H will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2H.
For variable driving conditions, the 4H AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is
engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear
wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically
engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2H
mode.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to
lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended
for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components. For further information on shifting
into 4H or 4L Ú page 160.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light will
illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into
the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed will be approximately three times (four times
for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H AUTO OR 4H AUTO TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H AUTO can be made
with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The
preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph
(72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer
case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Do not accelerate while
shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force
when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H/4H AUTO TO 4H PART TIME OR 4H PART
TIME TO 2H/4H AUTO
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME
can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion.
The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph
(72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer
case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Do not accelerate while
shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force
when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the
shift to take place. Shifting while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage
to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transfer case
fluid warms up. This is normal.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
4H PART TIME/4H AUTO TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
PART TIME/4H AUTO
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h),
shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N),
or press the clutch pedal on a manual
transmission. While the vehicle is coasting at 1 to
3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever
firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with
the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is
completed, place the automatic transmission into
DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual
transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 1 to
3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage
or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster
than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving
force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin
caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel.
If traction differs between the two rear wheels, the
differential automatically proportions the usable
torque by providing more torque to the wheel that
has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery
driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the
accelerator will supply maximum traction.
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) FRONT AND
R
EAR — IF EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L.
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or
less.
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the
same speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY”
will illuminate), push the switch up to lock the front
axle and rear axle (the “FRONT + REAR” will
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage or
loss of power and vehicle control. You could have
a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the
transfer case is fully engaged.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential, never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground. The vehicle may drive
through the rear wheel remaining on the ground
and cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminate). When the rear axle is locked, pushing
the bottom of switch again will lock or unlock the
front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully
locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF
button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out
of 4L, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
The Axle Lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once
vehicle speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY —
I
F EQUIPPED
The rear axle may be locked in 4H if the proper
conditions are met.
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
panel (to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4H.
The vehicle must be in Off Road+ active
Ú page 163.
Vehicle must be in ESC “Full Off” mode
Ú page 278.
Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel slip
or tight cornering condition.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (“REAR ONLY” will
illuminate).
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF
button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out
of 4H, Off Road+ is turned off by the driver, ESC
“Full Off” is exited, or the ignition switch is turned
to the OFF position.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle is
fully locked or unlocked.
The rear Axle Lock system may temporarily
disengage the rear locker under some conditions.
If this occurs, the rear axle will automatically
re-lock as soon as the system allows.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system
allows greater front suspension travel in off-road
situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
located on the instrument panel (to the right of the
steering column).
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
SWAY BAR Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system.
Push the switch again to deactivate the system.
The Sway Bar Indicator Light (located in the
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is
disconnected. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will
flash during activation transition, or when
activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during
normal driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
either 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to
obtain the off-road position Ú page 157. The Sway
Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences.
This condition is due to driving surface differences
or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway
bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left
halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment
may require that the vehicle be driven onto level
ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR
switch again.
OFF ROAD+ — IF EQUIPPED
OFF ROAD+ Switch
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected
before driving on hard surfaced roads or at
speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h); a discon-
nected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the
loss of vehicle control, which could result in seri-
ous injury. Under certain circumstances, the
front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle sta-
bility and assists with vehicle control. The sys-
tem monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to
reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over
18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flash-
ing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once vehi-
cle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h),
the system will once again attempt to return to
off-road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
on-road mode, the Sway Bar Indicator Light will
flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle stabil-
ity may be reduced. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster
than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a disconnected sta-
bilizer/sway bar may contribute to the loss of
vehicle control, which could result in serious
injury.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
When activated, Off Road+ is designed to improve
the user experience when using specific Off Road
driving modes. To activate Off Road+, push the
OFF ROAD+ switch in the switch bank. The
vehicle’s performance will improve depending on
which Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode is activated.
NOTE:
Off Road+ will not function in 2H mode. If the
button is pushed while in 2H mode, the cluster
display will show the message “Off Road+
Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.
When Off Road+ is active, the following features
will activate:
The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster display
A mode-specific message will display the instru-
ment cluster display
Off-Road Pages will launch on the radio
head-unit if selected in radio settings
The Off-Road Camera will launch if selected in
radio settings
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to behave
in different ways depending on the 4WD mode in
use. The following enhancements will occur when
using Off Road+.
4L
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl
and controllability focus, change in shifting
schedule when rock crawling, pedal calibration
shifted to de-gain and low range, operates at
lower vehicle speeds
Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differen-
tial tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
Off Road+: Recall the last status between igni-
tion cycles
4H
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved
sand performance/wheel slip focus, change in
shift schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration
set to aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle
speeds
Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning
brake lock differential with no engine manage-
ment
Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with unlim-
ited speed
Off Road+: Will default to OFF between ignition
cycles
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
will not function while using Off Road+. A dedicated
cluster message will display indicating this if either
feature is activated while in Off Road+.
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off Road+,
the following will occur on the vehicle:
Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control
will turn off, but Stability Control will remain
active.
Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Trac-
tion Control and Stability Control will turn off.
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electro-Hydraulic
Power Steering system that provides increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The
system adapts to different driving conditions. If the
Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering system
experiences a fault that prevents it from providing
power steering assist, then the system will provide
mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the
electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power
steering assistance in order to prevent damage
to the system. Normal operation will resume
once the system is allowed to cool.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and
a flashing icon are displayed on the instrument
cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs
to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance Ú page 120.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an
icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the power steering
system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition
no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,
pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments
until the light turns off Ú page 120.
NOTE:
Even if power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
cially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed
to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if
the required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will
automatically restart the engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a
heavy-duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque
contain a heavy-duty motor generator and an
additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
from vehicle deceleration for use on engine startup
after a stop as well as providing launch torque
assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start system be
disabled during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
battery used to power the Stop/Start system and
the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The
secondary battery is located behind the wheel well
for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
AUTOSTOP MODE
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to
properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver
ignition start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are
met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
Autostop mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 120.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The shifter must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed
in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start
Screen. Situations when the engine will not stop
include (but not limited to):
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
Gear selector is in MANUAL (M) mode.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
Engine or exhaust temperature is too high.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
sure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Vehicle speed threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models
Only).
ACC is on and speed is set.
Vehicle is at high altitude.
System fault is present.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system going
into a STOP/START READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically
re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted higher.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five
minutes.
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only).
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “Stop/Start OFF” message will appear in
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section, and the autostop function will be disabled
Ú page 120.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off
and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 120.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key start.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed
to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if
the required conditions are met. Pressing the
clutch pedal will automatically restart the vehicle.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a
heavy-duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque
contain a heavy duty motor generator and an
additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
from vehicle deceleration for use on engine startup
after a stop as well as providing launch torque
assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start be disabled
during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
battery used to power the Stop/Start system and
the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The
secondary battery is located behind the wheel well
for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver
ignition start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT
READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into an STOP/
START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state.
A STOP/START READY message will be displayed
in the instrument cluster
Ú
page 120.
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph
(3 km/h).
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL posi-
tion and the clutch pedal must be fully released.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
are fulfilled. Situations when the engine will not
stop include (but not limited to):
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C)
or greater than 109°F (43°C).
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
Battery is discharged.
When driving in REVERSE.
Hood is open.
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver’s door is
open.
Vehicle is at high altitude.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Forward Gear is engaged.
Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models
Only).
System fault is present.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system going
into a STOP/START READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine
will start when the clutch pedal is pressed (does
not require complete/full pedal press). The vehicle
will go into STOP/START SYSTEM NOT READY
mode until the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
automatically while in STOP/START AUTOSTOP
ACTIVE mode
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted higher.
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five
minutes.
Battery voltage drops too low.
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to
properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in
the instrument cluster Ú page 120.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
Stop/Start system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually turned off,
the engine can only be started and stopped by
cycling the ignition switch.
5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
an ON condition every time the ignition is
turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 120.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or
SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released, then the new
set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
ments until the button is released, then the new
set speed will be established.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system off when you
are not using it.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from
memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission
only)
Vehicle is operating at a low RPM (manual trans-
mission only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function
performs differently if your vehicle is not equipped
with ACC Ú page 169.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
sion Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the feature selected
Ú page 431.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
On vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion, will bring the vehicle to a complete
stop while following a vehicle ahead and
hold the vehicle for two seconds in the
stop position. If the vehicle ahead does
not start moving within two seconds, the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manually.
An audible chime will sound when the
brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
tions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the manual transmission is in FIRST gear
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h) (manual transmission)
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
When ESC Full Off mode is active
When Off Road+ (if equipped) is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed
Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission,
the ACC system cannot be set when the vehicle
speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h) or when the
vehicle is in FIRST gear.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
be controlling the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accel-
erator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph
(24 km/h) (manual transmission only)
The clutch is pressed for more than 10 seconds
(manual transmission only)
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than
10 seconds (manual transmission only)
The driver shifts to FIRST gear (manual trans-
mission only)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the RES
button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will show the last set speed.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system
will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no
alarm will sound even if you are too close to the
vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to
a complete stop longer than two seconds, the
system will cancel. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or
SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the
vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Light. The
system will then adjust vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor
The distance setting is changed
The system disengages Ú page 173
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the
left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop
(Automatic Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following a target
vehicle, your vehicle will resume motion without
the need for any driver action if the target vehicle
starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required
at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver
intervention will be required at this moment.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels
with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an authorized
dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or after-
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor
realigned at an authorized dealer.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or
ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
path this warning may temporarily occur.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and
forward facing camera inspected at an authorized
dealer.
“SERVICE ACC/FCW” WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using
ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no vehicle in
front detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve
the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on
hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
following lane changing example, ACC has not yet
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not
detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a
vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following exits
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and a detected
obstacle when backing up (e.g. during a parking
maneuver). For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 183.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at
this gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in
REVERSE and above the system's operating speed,
a warning will appear within the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 120. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist ready
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions based
on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the center
rear region and will produce a one-half second
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show a single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and emit a fast sound tone that will
change from fast to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single flashing
arc in the left and/or right rear region and will
produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from fast to continuous.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch located below
the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster display
Ú page 120 will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE (Not in 4WD Low).
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will remain
on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear
Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and
it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone (for
rear center only)
Slow (for rear
center only)
Slow (for rear
center only)
Fast (for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will show the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS"
or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction
and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors
quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure
washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the
sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of
snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
cycle the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the
touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle in the center of the spare tire.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Controls button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera delay turned on, the rear Camera image
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen
button X to disable display of the Rear View
Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the Back Up Camera button in
the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The image
will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen button X, the transmission is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
The touchscreen button X to disable display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when
the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with
parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
When enabled, fixed guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that
allows you to you see an on-screen image of the
front view of your vehicle. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen.
Front View Camera
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
The TrailCam system has programmable settings
that may be selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the below
methods:
Press the FWD Camera button on the controls
screen.
Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the
apps menu.
Press the TrailCam button on the Off Road
Pages.
Press the Off Road+ button when “Auto Launch
Off Road+” (if equipped) has been selected
under camera settings.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by
pressing the icon on the Back Up Camera view.
The Back Up Camera view can also be activated by
pressing the icon on the TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera Delay turned off and TrailCam view is
active, the TrailCam mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera Delay turned on and the TrailCam view is
active, the TrailCam image will be displayed for up
to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
the touchscreen button X to disable display of the
TrailCam view is pressed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through
the Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
a display timer for the image is initiated. The image
will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the
TrailCam image will be displayed continuously
until deactivated via the touchscreen button X,
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button X to disable the display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of
the vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the Clean Camera soft button
located on the TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam.
Washer fluid will stop when the button is released.
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at
a time while holding the button.
The Clean Camera system is not available when
windshield washing is in process.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are
projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam view
based on the steering wheel position.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of
the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for
this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter-
clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
close fuel filler door.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn
until you hear one click. This is an indication that
the cap is properly tightened.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the
MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened
every time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel filler cap is
possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If
the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP”
message will display in the odometer display.
Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the
system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem
will turn the MIL off.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of
the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for
this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter-
clockwise.
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper
fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly
fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate, due to
fuel vapors escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — DEF Filler
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
close fuel filler door.
NOTE:
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until
you hear one click. This is an indication that the
cap is properly tightened.
AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
cause severe damage to the engine fuel system.
Proper maintenance of the engine fuel filter and
fuel tank is essential see Ú page 362.
BULK FUEL STORAGE — DIESEL FUEL
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of
the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated
with water will promote the growth of “microbes.”
These microbes form “slime” that will clog the fuel
filtration system and lines. Drain condensation
from the supply tank and change the line filter on
a regular basis.
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel,
air is pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start see Ú page 364.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent
diesel emissions standards required by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels
of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines)
that are harmful to our health and the environment
to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust
upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, it
converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into
harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe. You can
operate with the comfort that your vehicle is
contributing to a cleaner, healthier world
environment for this and generations to come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) injection system and a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission
requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following
components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
CAUTION!
For diesel engines, only use diesel fuel for motor
vehicles in accordance with ASTM D-975 Grade
S15 specifications. The use of other products or
mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair
and consequently void the warranty, due to the
damage caused. If you accidentally introduce
other types of fuel into the tank, do not start the
engine. Empty the tank. If the engine has been
run for even an extremely limited amount of
time, you must not only drain the fuel tank, but
the rest of the supply circuit as well.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
the engine running. Engine operation causes
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
cause serious injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Electronically-heated DEF Lines
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst enable
the achievement of diesel emission requirements;
while maintaining outstanding fuel economy,
drivability, torque and power ratings.
For system messages and warnings see
Ú page 120.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
system. You may occasionally hear an audible
clicking noise from under the vehicle at a stop.
This is normal operation.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time after
engine shutdown to purge the DEF system. This
is normal operation and may be audible from
the rear of the vehicle.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept
in temperatures between 10° and 90°F (-12° and
32°C), it will last a minimum of one year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest
temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at
temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The
system has been designed to operate in this
environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know
that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact
with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron
or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they
are subject to corrosion by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster
display) will display the level of DEF remaining in
the tank Ú page 120.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used in
your vehicle.
DEF FILL PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For the correct DEF fluid type see Ú page 424.
1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in fuel
door).
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill inlet.
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds
to update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank.
If you have a fault related to the DEF
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF
tank heater will possibly warm up the DEF
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can
result in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccu-
rate level readings.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start
refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off
(the shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is
full). Do not proceed with the refilling, to
prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label before
pouring the content of the bottle into the
DEF tank.
If systems which cannot be screwed in (e.g.
tanks) are used for refilling, after the indica-
tion appears on the instrument panel
display Ú page 116 fill the DEF tank with no
more than 2 gallons (8 liters).
If containers which can be screwed to the
filler are used, the reservoir is full when the
DEF level in the container stops pouring out.
Do not proceed further.
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to
the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off”
the DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
(-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes,
the system could be damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area immedi-
ately with water and use an absorbent mate-
rial to soak up the spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it
can result in severe damage to your engine,
including but not limited to failure of the fuel
pump and injectors.
Never add anything other than DEF to the tank
– especially any form of hydrocarbon such as
diesel fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or
any other petroleum-based product. Even a very
small amount of these, less than 100 parts per
million or less than 1 oz. per 78 gallons
(295 liters) will contaminate the entire DEF
system and will require replacement. If owners
use a container, funnel or nozzle when refilling
the tank, it should either be new or one that has
only been used for adding DEF. Mopar®
provides an attachable nozzle with its DEF for
this purpose.
CAUTION!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any
of the following happen: DEF stops flowing
from the fill bottle into the DEF fill inlet, DEF
splashes out the fill inlet, or a DEF pump
nozzle automatically shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on
this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of
manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and
front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 191.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 191.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be installed
between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue.
It typically provides adjustable friction associated
with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a Weight-Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard
for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch
class can tow and should be used to assist you in
selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended
towing condition.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight-Distributing Hitch Systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo (i.e., the GVWR), and the GVWR should never
exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and
Loading Information placard Ú page 391.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor-
mation” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW
Maximum Trailer TW
(See Note)
2.0L
Two–Door 8,016 lb (3,636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lb (3,682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
3.6L
Two–Door 8,016 lb (3,636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lb (3,682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
3.0L Diesel Four–Door 8,427 lb (3,822 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
(Continued)
(Continued)
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended:
Towing Requirements — Tires
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 391.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing as
safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance,
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure,
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the frame or hook retainers of the
vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. Always block or "chock"
the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
WARNING!
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
CAUTION!
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping and backing the trailer in an area away
from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer
towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid
excessive clutch slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into (N) Neutral,
automatic transmission must be in PARK, and
manual transmission must be in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK.
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL
[N]).
Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
to the transfer case.
Automatic transmissions must be placed in
PARK for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
Shifting Into (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into (N) Neutral.
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on
manual transmissions) for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic
transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission
in FIRST gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
Manual transmissions must be placed in gear
(not in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the proce-
dure outlined under “Shifting Into (N) Neutral”
to be certain that the transfer case is fully in
(N) Neutral. Otherwise, internal damage will
result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted
clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper
face bar will be damaged.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
(N) Neutral position disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic
transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission
is in gear). The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
(N) Neutral position disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral
before recreational towing to prevent damage to
internal parts.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place
manual transmission in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL).
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of (N) Neutral,
the engine should remain off to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or
place manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions), and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give
them a higher center of gravity than conventional
passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for cornering at
the same speeds as conventional passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage if so equipped.
1. Remove both nuts and bolt from the
underside of the vehicle for each bracket.
Underside Nuts
2. Remove the side step assembly.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in (N) Neutral and the engine
running. With the transfer case in (N) Neutral
ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting the
transmission into PARK.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Bumper End Cap Removal
The end caps on your vehicle’s front fascia/
bumper can be removed by following the steps
below:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on steel fascia/
bumpers only.
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR
bracket (Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap
using a T45 torx bit screw driver. Do not
remove the bolts.
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle
and store it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain
and area before proceeding. There are many types
of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel,
rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every
surface has a different effect on your vehicle's
steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering
wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid
sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most
cases, there are no road signs, posted speed limits
or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use your
own good judgment on what is safe and what is
not. When on a trail, you should always be looking
ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route
while remembering what you are currently driving
over.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be
disabled during off-road use.
When To Use 4L Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to
increase low speed pulling power. This range
should be limited to extreme situations such as
deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles
in an off-road situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your
vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
additional low speed pulling power is needed.
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4L.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle
(two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or
other stepped objects, using light brake pressure
with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking
or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep
incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
SNOW
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction
at slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low
gear and the transfer case into 4L if necessary. Do
not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more
than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while still
applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get
fresh traction and help maintain your momentum.
MUD
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around
the tires and is very difficult to get through. You
should use DRIVE, with the transfer case in the 4L
position to maintain your momentum. If you start to
slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no
more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth for
additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They
are normally full of debris from previous vehicles
getting stuck. As a good practice before entering
any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it
is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the
vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.
SAND
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full
tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a
trail, maintain your vehicle's momentum and do
not stop. The key to driving in soft sand is using the
appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly,
avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the
vehicle's momentum. If you are going to be driving
on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your
tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to
allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire
pressure will drastically improve your traction and
handling while driving on the soft sand, but you
must return the tires to normal air pressure before
driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be
sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to
reducing the pressure.
Crossing Obstacles
(Rocks And Other High Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many
types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring
different types of obstacles. Before proceeding,
review the path ahead to determine the correct
approach and your ability to safely recover the
vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm
grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L when operating the vehicle on dry
pavement. Driveline hardware damage can
result.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine
braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire
unseating and total loss of air pressure. To
reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure
and ease the vehicle up and over the object.
USING A SPOTTER
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path.
Determining the correct path can be extremely
difficult when you are confronting many obstacles.
In these cases have someone guide you over,
through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they
can see the obstacle, watch your tires and
undercarriage, and guide you through.
CROSSING LARGE ROCKS
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
which ensures you drive over the largest of them
with your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over
the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and
thicker than the side wall and is designed to take
the abuse. Always look ahead and make every
effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CROSSING A RAVINE, GULLY, DITCH,
WASHOUT OR RUT
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a
large rut, the angled approach is the key to
maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each
tire go through the obstacle independently. You
need to use caution when crossing large obstacles
with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large
obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough
to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left
at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout
you just created. You should now be able to drive
out following the trench you just created at a
45-degree angle.
CROSSING LOGS
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one
front tire to be on top of the log while the other just
starts to climb the log. While climbing the log,
modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid
spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
GETTING HIGH-CENTERED
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object,
get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the
vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the
underbody and what is the best direction to
recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in
contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few
rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high
point when you let the vehicle down. You can also
try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
system loading which could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is
large enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep
sides.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance or
the vehicle will become high-centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
limitations. Hills can cause serious problems.
Some are just too steep to climb and should not be
attempted. You should always feel confident with
the vehicle and your abilities. You should always
climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to
climb a hill on an angle.
BEFORE CLIMBING A STEEP HILL
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or
steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to see
what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the trail
straight up and down? What is on top and the other
side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or other
obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the
vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, shift the
transmission into a lower gear with 4L engaged,
and proceed with caution, maintaining your
momentum as you climb the hill.
DRIVING UP HILL
Once you have determined your ability to proceed
and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line
your vehicle up for the straightest possible run.
Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply
more power as you start up the hill. Do not race
forward into a steep grade; the abrupt change of
grade could cause you to lose control. If the front
end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly
to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you
approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle
and slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start
to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off
the accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly
back and forth. This will provide a fresh "bite" into
the surface and will usually provide enough
traction to complete the climb. If you do not make
it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine
resistance along with the vehicle brakes.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to
determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. What
is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to
maintain a slow, controlled descent? Are there
obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty
of distance at the base of the hill to regain control
if the vehicle descends too fast? If you feel
confident in your ability to proceed, then make
sure you are in 4L and proceed with caution. Allow
engine braking to control the descent and apply
your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires
to lock.
DRIVING ACROSS AN INCLINE
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If
it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving
across an incline places more weight on the
downhill wheels, which increases the possibilities
of a downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the
surface has good traction with firm and stable
soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an
incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may
result in severe injury.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
braking. Descending a grade too fast could
cause you to lose control and be seriously
injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
IF YOU STALL OR BEGIN TO LOSE HEADWAY
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing
a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brake. Restart the
engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down
the hill allowing engine braking to control the
descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but
do not allow the tires to lock.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of
water. Water crossings should be avoided, if
possible, and only be attempted when necessary in
a safe, responsible manner. Only drive through
areas which are designated and approved. Tread
lightly and avoid damage to the environment.
Know your vehicle's abilities and be able to recover
it if something goes wrong. Never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you
ingested water into the engine air intake. If the
engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it.
Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to
any crossing is low and slow. Shift into FIRST gear
(manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L
position and proceed very slowly with a constant
slow speed of {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum}
and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not
try to accelerate through the crossing. After
crossing any water higher than the bottom of the
axle differentials, inspect all of the vehicle fluids
for signs of water ingestion.
BEFORE YOU CROSS ANY TYPE OF WATER
As you approach any type of water, you need to
determine if you can cross it safely and
responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through
the water or probe it with a stick. You need to be
sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you
will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
crossing is the water depth, current and bottom
conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in,
effectively increasing the water level on the
vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining
the depth and the ability to safely cross.
CROSSING PUDDLES, POOLS, FLOODED
AREAS OR OTHER STANDING WATER
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water
areas normally contain murky or muddy waters.
These water types normally contain hidden
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom
condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering.
This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle
recovery. If you are able to determine you can
safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow
method.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may
result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which
may result in severe injury. Always back carefully
straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill,
always drive straight up or down.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission,
transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can
occur if you drive too fast or through too deep
of water. Water can cause permanent damage
to engine, driveline or other vehicle compo-
nents, and your brakes will be less effective
once wet and/or muddy.
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
CROSSING DITCHES, STREAMS, SHALLOW
RIVERS OR OTHER FLOWING WATER
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never
attempt to cross a fast running stream or river
even in shallow water. Fast moving water can
easily push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it
out of control. Even in very shallow water, a high
current can still wash the dirt out from around your
tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and
vehicle damage with slower water currents in
depths greater than the vehicle's running ground
clearance. You should never attempt to cross
flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle's
running ground clearance. Even the slowest
current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream
and out of control if the water is deep enough to
push on the large surface area of the vehicle's
body. Before you proceed, determine the speed of
the current, the water's depth, approach angle,
bottom condition and if there are any obstacles.
Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream
using the low and slow technique.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual trans-
mission bell housing for mud and debris and clean
as required.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the
radiator.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It
can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it
out of control. This could put you and your
passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
207
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer immediately.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen And Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and the
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button at
a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
Units
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will turn the weather alerts on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in
the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi,
kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque” (Nm or lb-ft) units of
measurement independently.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
Voice
Clock
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system.
The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
Show Time in Status Bar/Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency
Braking Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off.
The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting
will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning
+ Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake
pressure when a collision is detected.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines
This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines on or
off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn the Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach/Illuminated Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Auto Dim High Beams/Automatic High Beam Headlamps This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Interior Ambient Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Interior Ambient Lights on or off.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock/Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start/Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™) on or off.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
AUX Switches
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems
when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Heated Seat & Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX
switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power
source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from
the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you can set if
the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX switches were set.
The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state
conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source is
set to Ignition.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
Audio
After pressing the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Doors On Key Off Power Delay/Doors On Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned on. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay/Doors Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
Phone/Bluetooth®
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Setting Name Description
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are
“Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and
“Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Projection Manager
This setting will activate your smartphone to be projected on the vehicle’s
touchscreen.
Setting Name Description
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Info
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a separate subscription.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
Reset/Restore Settings
System Information
When the Reset/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its
default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Reset App Drawer To Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Apps
This setting will restore all installed apps. This feature is used if there is an
issue using or installing apps.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This setting will display the software licensing information screen.
Map Update
This setting will display different ways to update maps of the radio into your
system. “Download System Information To USB” and “Generate Request
Code” will appear as the two options to select from.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button 5 — Controls Button
2 — Media Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Climate Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Apps Button
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 226.
Phone
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the
hands-free phone system Ú page 239.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system
off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to
reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from
freezing or being stuck.
Compass
Press/Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to access the vehicle’s
compass.
More Press/Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your
preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to
replace an existing shortcut in the main menu
bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Controls — If Equipped
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats
and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Mobile apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
control functions Ú page 62.
Feature Description
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 431.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three
and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available (AM/
FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will Seek Down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
the current track.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on
and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob
clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
be set at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Seek Down
4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse Button
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Menu Bar
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by
pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pushing the left steering wheel
audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band two
times, the radio will stop at the station where it
began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up
or Seek Down button to advance the radio
through the available stations or channels at a
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information related
to the currently playing song and radio station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
press “Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
the system will automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
wait for the beep to say a command. See an
example:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The system
provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
radio does not have the necessary subscription,
the radio is able to receive the Preview channel
only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents visit http://
www.siriusxm.com/getallaccess or call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/
or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to
22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk
radio. Once the channel is switched, content in
replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The
Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will
display at the top of the screen, along with the
replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of
live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the
Pause/Play button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in
steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the
content at the point at which the press is released.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the
content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be
done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the
content at the point at which the press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live
content.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When
pressing the All button, the following categories
become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List.
The radio tunes to a channel with the content in
the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at
the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
to that channel.
Select Team Or Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Select Team or Add/Delete button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you can
select a team by pressing the corresponding box. A
check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
upon score update” or both when one or more of
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as
a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You
can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll
the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL
knob or by pressing the Up or Down Arrow key,
located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button or the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the
Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio button.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the
X button.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease
each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
When available, you can select the Browse button
on the touchscreen to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info
button on the touchscreen for artist information on
the current song playing.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into
the USB port, by selecting the USB button on the
left side of the touchscreen, or by selecting the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped) or by pushing the
MEDIA button on the faceplate and then selecting
the USB button.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Browse
3 — Source
4 — Pause/Play
5 — Info
6 — More Options
7 — Seek Up
1 — Repeat
2 — Select Source
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Browse
7 — Tracks
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert
a USB device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
display will show the track number and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
containing music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 239.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
button on the left side of the touchscreen or under
the Source Select/Select Source button (if
equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
the AUX port, or by pressing the AUX button on the
left side of the touchscreen, or under the Source
Select button (if equipped) or by pushing the
MEDIA button on the faceplate, selecting the
Source button and then the AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and
begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
provided by the radio; use the device controls
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button,
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down button
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or to return to the beginning
of the previous selection if the USB device is within
the first three seconds of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second
of the current selection.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays
a list of ways you can browse through the contents
of the USB device. If supported by the device, you
can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song,
etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen
on the left side of the screen. The center of the
browse window shows items and their
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by
pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The
TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the
BROWSE button on the faceplate or press the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the device.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted
when active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is
active. Press the Repeat button again to enter
Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the
Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 227.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the
touchscreen to display the current track
information. Press the Info or X button on the
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List.
The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When in
the Tracks List screen you can rotate the TUNE/
SCROLL knob to highlight a track (indicated by the
line above and below the track name) and then
push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing
that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button on
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist:
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song, and genre information
is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call
logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as you
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
the system's microphone for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the
Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system.
Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one
audio device can be used with the system at a
time.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel
is used to get into the Phone Mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming or
outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc.
When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in”
and when you are already in a call or
want to make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
Voice Command features if your vehicle is
equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
the following compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command form
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
system filters out certain non-word utterances and
sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
the topic or context and provides the associated
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the user, it
will ask a question to which the user can respond
without pushing the Voice Command button on the
steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone button.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect
Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone
pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec-
tions.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing
or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add
Device button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect”
and accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete
the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
For information on how to pair a Bluetooth®
streaming audio device with the Uconnect 3 With
5-inch Display radio Ú page 241.
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device the
highest priority. This device will take precedence
over other paired devices within range.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to bring
up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular
phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred “Connected
Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. Your
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, Ú page 248.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the
Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button
next to the selected number to display the
option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
to remove from your favorites. This will bring
up the options for that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that
you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation. For
example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Phone button on the steering
wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the keypad (if supported by your
mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following
beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to
press the Transfer button on the touchscreen
when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”
(letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
PHONE VOICE COMMANDS
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
say a command. Here are some examples:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “Call”, then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your
phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work”.
VOICE TEXT REPLY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and
say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages
and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
text message.
SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
your voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system Ú page 431.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your
Uconnect system, and your
Android™ 6.0 or higher powered
smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your
smartphone and a number of its apps onto the
touchscreen radio display. Android Auto™ brings
you useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with speech
technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio
display’s touchscreen to control many of your
apps. To use Android Auto™, perform the following
procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your Android™-powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone
to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.
If the Android Auto™ app was not downloaded,
the first time you plug your device in the app
begins to download. Your vehicle should be in
PARK the first time you use the app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that
came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may
not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen.
Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized,
the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
changes to the Android Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
compatible device is connected. You can also
launch it by pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the
touchscreen.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for
music
Hands-free calling and texting for communica-
tion
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel until the
beep or tap the Microphone icon to ask
Google to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access other
navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to www.android.com/
auto/ (US) or https://www.android.com/intl/
en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
For further information on the navigation function,
please refer to https://support.google.com/
android or https://support.google.com/
androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and
stream your favorite music with apps like
YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify.
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you
can stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up
on your smartphone prior to using Android Auto™
for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
system’s media screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push and
hold the VR button on the steering wheel
to activate voice recognition specific to
Android Auto™. This allows you to send
and reply to text messages, have incoming text
messages read out loud, and place and receive
hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible
apps that are available to use with Android Auto™,
every time it is launched. You must have the
compatible app downloaded, and you must be
signed in to the app through your mobile device for
it to work with Android Auto™.
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to
see the latest list of available apps for Android
Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with its best-in-class speech technology
through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project
your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto™ icon that replaces your Phone icon
on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel,
or press and hold the Microphone icon within
Android Auto™, to activate its VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll
need an Android™ phone running Android™ 6.0
or higher, an active data plan, and the Android
Auto™ app.
To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car
display, you need a compatible Android™ smart-
phone with an active data plan. You can check
which smartphones are compatible at g.co/
androidauto/requirements.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with
Apple CarPlay®, the smarter,
more secure way to use your
iPhone® in the car, and stay
focused on the road. Use your
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs
and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access
to Apple Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using
iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings,
ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for the very first
connection only, and then use the following
procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables
may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized,
the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
changes to the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You
can also launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay®
icon on the touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage
is shown on the left side of the radio screen. Data
plan rates apply.
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the
VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition session.
You can also press and hold the Home
button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to Siri.
This allows you to make calls or listen to voicemail
as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not function
with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all
your artists, playlists, and music from
iTunes® or any third party application
installed on your device. Using your
iPhone® data plan, you can also use select third
party audio apps including music, news, sports,
podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply to
text messages. Siri can also read incoming text
messages, but drivers will not be able to read
messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel until the beep or tap the
Microphone icon to ask Apple® Siri to
take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps
that are available to use, every time it is launched.
You must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through your
mobile device for it to work with Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US)
or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/
(Canada) to see the latest list of available apps for
Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region and/
or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of
its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect
your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable,
and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to
begin Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to
use a list of your iPhone® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use
and privacy statements apply.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any setup
required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth®
is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
connections to function. The connected device is
unavailable to other devices when connected
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System — If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to
the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android
Auto™/Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will
be used to place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another
device can also be paired to the Uconnect system,
via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so the
passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
launched from the front and center console USB
ports.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED ?
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS
button are connected vehicles. These buttons will
be located on either the rearview mirror or
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you have
a connected radio and can take advantage of the
many connected vehicle features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS
buttons Ú page 330.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first need to
activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, trans-
mission and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 271.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveuco-
nnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call
1-877-324-9091
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in
the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline communications
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
MULTIMEDIA 255
networks. Depending on the type of device in your
vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or
3G or 4G (data) network compatible with your
device. SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the
continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto
Rico and Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services are dependent upon an operative
telematics device, a cellular connection, naviga-
tion map data, and GPS satellite signal recep-
tion, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels,
weather, damage to the electrical system or
other important parts of your vehicle, network
congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third
parties or the government, Internet failure, and/
or the physical location of your vehicle, such as
in an underground parking structure or under a
bridge.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available
for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote
start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by
using the Mobile App or your computer.
If equipped — Send & Go capability with the
Mobile App. Use the Mobile App to easily search,
map and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Mobile App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for
contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care,
Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you
directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Activation — If Equipped
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™
in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list
of apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email ad-
dress to activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial*
period for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services starting on the date of vehicle purchase.
To get started with your trial, enrollment in
SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 MULTIMEDIA
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Mobile App
Once you have activated your services, you’re only
a few steps away from using connected services.
Download the Mobile App to your mobile device.
Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in the United States, visit
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/Register
button in the upper right-hand corner to register
your account online.
a. Click the Register button.
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification to
confirm/verify your newly created account.
d. After clicking the email link, it will take you
to a website and prompt you to assign your
account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your VIN.
For customers in Canada, register your account
via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu
bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from the
apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
mation email will be sent to the provided
email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confir-
mation email. It may take a short time
before remote services will be available, but
you will be able to log into the Mobile App
and the Owner’s Site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set up
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote
Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if
equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom menu
bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your Mobile Naviga-
tion, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you
with all the information you need, all in one place.
You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch
videos about your vehicle's features, and easily
access your manuals. It is also where you can
manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This
section will familiarize you with the key elements of
the website that will help you get the most of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign
In/Register button and enter your email address
and password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health
Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will then
prompt you to log in using your email address and
password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact infor-
mation, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN,
click on the Edit/Edit Profile button to access
the details of your account.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
MULTIMEDIA 257
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, press one of these icons and enter
your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN
to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock
doors or sound the horn and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail to
notify you of the event. To set up the notifications,
please follow these instructions:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
and then “Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™”
where you can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can customize
the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call — If Equipped
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
in the event of an emergency. When the
connection between the vehicle and the live agent
is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit
location information. In the event of a minor
collision, medical or any other emergency, press
the SOS button to be connected to a call center
agent who can send emergency assistance to your
vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
are dependent on an operational Uconnect
system, cellular network availability that is
compatible with the device in your vehicle, and
GPS network availability. Not all features of
SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at
all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light
will turn green indicating a call has been
placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or overhead console or press the
Cancel button on the touchscreen within
10 seconds.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call, will NOT work without a network connection
compatible with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through your mobile
device versus the hands-free system which
is not available due to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is
made, the agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may be
recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and
that travel into Mexico and Canada may have
limited services. In particular, responses to SOS
calls or other emergency services may be
unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased
outside the United States and Canada are unable
to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact
your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop SOS Call system operation. These include,
but are not limited to, the following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
(including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
system, among other vehicle systems, will not
operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
(Continued)
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an
accident, a live agent will contact you through the
Uconnect system and alert emergency services.
NOTE:
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is
required for this feature to function.
After a crash where the airbags deploy:
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an
agent.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the
location of the emergency.
3. If needed, the agent will request the
assistance of emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The
agent will remain on the call until emergency
services arrive.
NOTE:
Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the
case of an emergency.
On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
members about the collision.
Agents can brief first responders of the situation
before they arrive on scene.
In the event vehicle occupants are unable to
speak, emergency services will be dispatched
based on the last known GPS coordinates.
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics
device, a cellular connection, navigation map
data, and GPS satellite reception, which can
limit the ability to reach the response center or
reach emergency support.
Terms of service of the Uconnect and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ subscriber agreement
apply. See terms of services for complete
service limitation.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid
interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE MOBILE APPS
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED
SERVICES WILL OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instru-
ment panel if a malfunction in any part of the
air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag
system may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not be able to send a
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services if needed.
If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road condi-
tions or location), do not wait for voice contact
from a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING!
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device. These
features include locking/unlocking, remote
starting, and activating the horn and lights of the
vehicle.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and Mobile
App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Mobile App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on
your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s
Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered
into your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you
want to send the command to by clicking on its
image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to activate
that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same
four-digit code established when you activated
your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services).
Please enter your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you
know if the command was received by your
vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
if you are unable to lock your vehicle through
the Mobile App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility
to protect your PIN appropriately.
Lock
Press this button to
lock your vehicle.
Vehicle Start
Press this button to
start your vehicle.
Horn & Lights
Press this button to
sound the horn and
activate your lights.
Unlock
Press this button to
unlock your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start
Press this button to
cancel remote start.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
MULTIMEDIA 261
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with
SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. If using
the Mobile App to command your vehicle, your
device must be compatible and be connected to
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data)
network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and
Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote
Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not
be processed if the vehicle is in motion, the igni-
tion key is on or during an emergency call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via
your Owner’s Site or through the Mobile App on
your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with
the ability to start the engine on your vehicle
without the keys and from virtually any distance.
Once started, the preset climate controls in your
vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote Vehicle
Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not entered
your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off
automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob
within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been armed
and not triggered since the last vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of
fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the
vehicle must be started at least once after
alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention
to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every
time a command is sent to turn on the horn and
lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to
be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the
surroundings when using this feature. You are
responsible for compliance with local laws, rules
and ordinances in the location of your vehicle
when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Assist — If Equipped
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services feature may contain an ASSIST
button in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services have been activated, the ASSIST
button can connect you directly to the Customer
Care call center (if equipped). You will be directed to
one of the following four services:
Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or
need a tow, you’ll be connected to someone
who can help anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has
expired, for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services, or help
answering any general questions surrounding
your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features, such
as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features — If Equipped
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and
you will be presented with your ASSIST options on
the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing
the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs that
you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services to you, we may
record and monitor your conversations with
Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care,
whether such conversations are initiated through
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services in
your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device, and
may share information obtained through such
recording and monitoring in accordance with
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
MULTIMEDIA 263
regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree
and consent to any recording, monitoring or
sharing of information obtained through any such
call recordings.
Send & Go — If Equipped
Description
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device, and then send
the route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
How It Works
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination.
After selecting the Location tab at the bottom
of the App, browse through one of the
categories provided, or type the name or
keyword in the search box. You can also
select categories such as “Favorites” or
“Contact List”.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current location.
Send the destination to the vehicle
(Send & Go).
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through
a notification or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the
location of your vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to
make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the
Mobile App and select the Location tab at the
bottom of the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network that is ready to go wherever you are.
After you've made your purchase, turn on your
device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or
any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone
on your private network access the Web — great
for working and relaxing.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 MULTIMEDIA
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an internet
access hotspot in the vehicle, using the
radio as an access point. The hotspot will
allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a
laptop or any other portable-enabled media
device) to wirelessly connect to the internet.
Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month trial
period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial can
be activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the How To
Purchase button and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to
the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push
the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
Customer Care agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can
change its name and the password by selecting the
Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi
Hotspot button. You can also view the connected
devices from the app screen by pressing the View
Connected Devices button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required
in order to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent
will ask for the stolen vehicle report number
(as issued by your local law enforcement). If
you have downloaded the Mobile App, you can
push the Settings menu button on your device,
select “Help”, and then select “SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement with
whom you filed the stolen vehicle report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work
with your local law enforcement to locate the
vehicle. You will be contacted by law
enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While
the investigation is ongoing, you should also
contact your insurance company to inform it of
the situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You
have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications in this vehicle when it
is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in
an accident involving in serious injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
MULTIMEDIA 265
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
If Equipped
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will be
sent to you every month so you can stay on top of
your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is provided
as a convenience to you and does not substitute
for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle may
collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM
Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your vehicle’s
health and performance, your vehicle’s location,
your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and
other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when
you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue
even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription unless you call SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care and tell them to deactivate your
Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/
privacy-policy.
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses
a problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems.
For further information, go to your Owner’s
website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register
and activate services. During this process you will
be asked to provide an email address to which the
reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind
you when services are needed, or to alert you of
other important information, such as recall
notices. When you receive a notification through
your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the
message, or press Call Care to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen
will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle
Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you
can reopen messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly to
your vehicle using Alexa.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa
for help, or complete a list of commands by saying:
“Alexa, ask <brand name> for help with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask
Alexa:
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code .”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 MULTIMEDIA
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for
SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 255.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to
Amazon Alexa:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials.
This will be the same user name and password
you used when registering for SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. There will be
additional settings to confirm on the following
screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the
<vehicle brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill
on Alexa!
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
keep tabs on your car. Google Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™ phones,
iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers, like
Google Home. If you need assistance, ask Google
for help, or for a complete list of commands by
saying: “Hey Google, ask <brand name> for help
with my car.”
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant
app on your smart phone from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant
app with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by
pressing the icon in the upper right-hand
corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand
name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
and password you created when you activated
SiriusXM Guardian™. There will be additional
settings to confirm on the following screen.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
linking process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote
start
Send a destination to your vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire pressure, fuel
level and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and
give you peace of mind when your loved ones are
out on the road. You can set boundary limits,
monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s
location any time, any place. Use the Mobile App to
set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle
is driven either out of or into a geographic
boundary that you set.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
MULTIMEDIA 267
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being
driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is
driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet
drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Mobile App right
on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Mobile App from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using
the username and password you created when
you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Mobile App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch,
you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering your
security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level,
vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and
more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel
for SmartWatch Integration.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™
Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
ASSIST button (if equipped) and then select
SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle
touchscreen to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your
call will be directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent
or held in a queue until an agent is available. If you
do not have an active subscription, push the
ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS —
I
F EQUIPPED
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror or overhead console?
You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS
Call button to cancel the call. To cancel the
call, either push the SOS Call button again, or
press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the
SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain
vehicle information, such as make and model,
is transmitted along with the last known GPS
location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can
use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or
someone else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it can
take up to three minutes or more for the
request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 MULTIMEDIA
quickly, however its range is limited and your
Mobile App comes in handy for these and
other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile devices,
which is why security measures have been
engineered into the Mobile App. Asking for
your username, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN are required for the
activation of Remote services through your
mobile device. It is your responsibility to
protect your passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App is compatible with most
devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these
devices allow us to remotely command your
vehicle. Other operating systems may be
supported in the future.
5. Why is the Mobile App running slow? The
Mobile App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G (data), or
5G (data) network connection. If either your
device or your vehicle is in an area with below
average coverage, it may take longer to log in
and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes,
once you enter your vehicle, and start the
engine, the pop-up message stating that you
have a new route will appear. There is an exit
button on the pop-up that will cancel the route
if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you
enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the
pop-up message offers a “Locations” option.
Once “Locations” is selected, you can choose
from a list of recently sent destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is your
responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly.
See the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™
terms of service for more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or more
for the request to get through to your vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the
horn and lights by pushing the red Panic
button.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
MULTIMEDIA 269
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To enhance
your privacy, and the privacy of others using
your vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is
required for you to activate this service. You
must involve local law enforcement to have
SiriusXM Guardian™ locate your vehicle. We
may also locate the vehicle for other law
enforcement or government agencies,
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the
service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that
you have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
your vehicle is recovered, you will be contacted
by law enforcement.
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance
rates? Some insurance providers offer lower
rates on vehicles equipped with systems that
can deter auto theft. When shopping for
insurance, be sure to inform the insurance
provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services subscription to find out if the insurance
provider can offer you a lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle and
yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will remote start your vehicle
more quickly. However its range is limited. For
example, when you are leaving the stadium
after the game, you can use the Mobile App to
remote start your vehicle and have the inside
of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get
to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their wireless
devices, which is why security measures have
been engineered into the Mobile App. Asking
for your username, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN help to ensure that
nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to
find your device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using
the App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires
the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start
feature simply starts the engine to warm up or
cool down the interior before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the
vehicle.
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely
command your vehicle. Other operating
systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or more
for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 MULTIMEDIA
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the
horn and lights by pressing the red Panic
button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will
continue for a maximum of three minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely
command your vehicle. Other operating
systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQ S —
I
F EQUIPPED
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
account? There are three ways that you can
register your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed
to an agent who can assist in registering
your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Select the button to speak with an
agent, who can assist in registering your
new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen
and then follow the prompts from the
provided email. You will receive an email
with an activation link that will be good for
72 hours. Once you click the activation link,
you will be prompted to fill out your informa-
tion and accept Terms and Conditions.
Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
Guardian™ home page to complete your
profile and demo the remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without an
email address, customers cannot register for
SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers need to
register so they can subscribe to receive
additional services and create a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN for remote command
requests.
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security
PIN? Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN during the registration process. The
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN will be
required to authenticate you when accessing
your account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting
Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can be
updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in your
vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated online
on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your Owner’s
Site then select Edit Profile to edit your
personal information. Make your edits and
click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for certain
Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription comes
up for renewal? If you have added a credit card
to your account information, your subscription
will be automatically renewed for a term length
in accordance with the service plan that you
have selected at the then current subscription
rate and on every renewal date thereafter,
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
MULTIMEDIA 271
unless you cancel your subscription by calling
SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If you have not
added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter in
advance of your expiration date to remind you
that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror or overhead console.
12. How do I update my credit card information?
Login to your Owner’s Site, and select Edit
Profile, then select SiriusXM Guardian™
Payment Account.
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter of notifi-
cation.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided
from the date of cancellation for annual plans
or longer. Please see the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for
refunds related to billing plans of other lengths
and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires?
Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your
subscription will be canceled the day you
cancel. If you have a monthly subscription,
your subscription will be canceled on the last
day of the month in which you choose to
cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all personal
information, returns the Uconnect system to
its original factory settings, removes all
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services and
account information. To remove your account
information from the Uconnect system,
contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease vehicle
or sold it? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection compatible with my device is
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services that
required your smartphone only direct calls to
Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if
you have an operable network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data
which may include information about your vehicle,
your vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in
your vehicle, and other data. The collection, use
and sharing of this information is required to
provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services and is further described by the Uconnect
Privacy Policy, which can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This
information may be collected by SiriusXM®
Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with
FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 MULTIMEDIA
diagnostic information including location data may
be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
information, including location data, may still be
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the connected services including
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent
to the collection, use and disclosure of this
information in accordance with the Uconnect
Privacy Policy. If you do not want this information to
be collected, used, or shared, you must cancel your
Uconnect services in their entirety by contacting us
as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 431.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, it
will provide you vehicle status information while
operating on off-road conditions. It supplies
information relating to the status of the drivetrain,
transfer case, coolant/oil gauges, pitch and roll of
the vehicle and access to the trailcam system.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button
on the touchscreen, and then select “Off-Road
Pages”.
Main Menu
1 — Mobile Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
MULTIMEDIA 273
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of
the three selectable page options. It provides
continually updating information for the following
items:
Current Transfer Case Status
Current Latitude/Longitude
Current Altitude of the vehicle
Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control and
Selected Speed in MPH (km/h)
Status of Off-Road+ Mode
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
DRIVETRAIN
The Drivetrain page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Sway Bar
3 — Front Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
5
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only),
Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
TRAILCAM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that
allows you to see an on-screen image of the front
view of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on
the touchscreen along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the TrailCam button on the
touchscreen.
TrailCam Activation
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Transmission Temperature
(Automatic Transmissions Only)
5 — Battery Voltage
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
275
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill
Descent Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support (RBS),
Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway
Control (TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SAFETY 277
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking
objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped) Ú page 277.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent accidents resulting from
loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may nega-
tively affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improp-
erly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifi-
cation or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system
can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
“ESC On” is the normal operating mode for the
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC
system will be in this mode. This mode should be
used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons as
noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to
return to “ESC On”.
Full Off — If Equipped
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate,
and the “ESC Off” message will display in the
instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
predetermined speed the system will return to ESC
“Full Off”.
If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is
active when "Full Off" mode is enabled by the
driver, ESC will not switch to "Partial Off" mode at
any speed and will remain in "Full Off" mode until
Off Road+ is exited or ESC is re-enabled by the
driver.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SAFETY 279
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is turned to the “ESC
On” mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (km) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON position.
Each time the ignition is place in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable
HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed. (If doors are attached,
then door must be closed. If doors are
detached, then driver seat belt must be
buckled.)
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The
set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The
following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
not activate
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SAFETY
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre-
sponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if
doors are attached or driver seat belt is
unbuckled if doors are detached.)
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an indicator light, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
flash for several seconds then extinguish when
the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
flash for several seconds then extinguish when
HDC disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will acti-
vate again once the brakes have cooled suffi-
ciently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back
from a complete stop while on an incline. If the
driver releases the brake while stopped on an
incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not
apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle
will roll down the hill as normal.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
safe vehicle speed.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SAFETY 281
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are
attached, then the door must be closed. If the
doors are detached then the driver's seat belt
must be buckled.)
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, refer to Ú page 207 for
further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS
is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SAFETY
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake system for
a panic stop.
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) —
If Equipped
RSRA will consider the presence of an object in the
rear seat when a rear entry/exit door is opened at
the beginning of each key cycle. To activate, the
rear door must be open for more than one second
and the vehicle must be placed in the RUN position
within 10 minutes. When the potential presence of
an object is determined and/or otherwise inferred,
a message will appear in the cluster display
reminding driver to check the rear seat(s)
immediately after key off, accompanied by an alert
upon exiting the vehicle.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in
4WD Low only. SSC maintains vehicle
speed by actively controlling engine
torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable
SSC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed (If doors are attached,
the door must be closed. If doors are detached,
the driver seat belt must be buckled).
The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically
once the following conditions are met:
The driver releases the throttle.
The driver releases the brake.
The driver seat belt is buckled.
The transmission is in any selection other than
PARK.
Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The driver door is closed. (If doors are attached,
the door must be closed. If doors are detached,
the driver seat belt must be buckled).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver,
and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-.
Additionally, the SSC set speed may be reduced
when climbing a grade and the level of set speed
reduction depends on the magnitude of grade. The
following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SAFETY 283
SSC Target Set Speeds — If Equipped With Off
Road+
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 0.9 mph (1.5 km/h)
3rd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
4th = 1.5 mph (2.5 km/h)
5th = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
6th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
7th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used
for SSC target speed selection but will not affect
the gear chosen by the transmission. While
actively controlling SSC, the transmission will
shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive
mode if active. The differences may be notable
to the driver as a varying level of aggressive-
ness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle
or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h). SSC will exist immediately.
The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if
doors are attached or driver seat belt is
unbuckled if doors are detached).
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC switch has a lamp that offers feedback to the
driver about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or
activated. These are the normal operating
conditions for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the SSC switch but enabled conditions
are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to over-
heated brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in
off-road conditions. The driver must remain
attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SAFETY
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of
the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions
similarly to a limited slip differential and controls
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on
a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to
the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations
Ú page 192.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located
inside the taillights, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.)
that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SAFETY 285
Warning Light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear
Ú
page 207.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors
are located. The system may also detect blockage
if the vehicle is operated in areas with extremely
low radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a
“Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The
system will automatically recover and resume
function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning
Light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume Ú page 287.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 sec-
onds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the
difference in speed between the two vehicles is
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light
will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes Ú page 431.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if
on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
Door Removal
When either the front driver or passenger door is
removed, the instrument cluster will display “Blind
Spot Temporarily Unavailable” and the BSM
system will disable. While the system will continue
to indicate whatever blind spot mode it was
previously in within the Uconnect system, no visual
or audible alerts will be provided. As long as the
doors are removed, the instrument cluster will
provide the “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable”
pop-up as a reminder that the system is disabled
every time the ignition is cycled.
Upon re-installation of both doors, the system will
resume functionality based on the personalized
mode selected.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver
with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a haptic
warning in the form of a brake jerk, to warn the
driver when it detects a potential frontal collision.
The warnings are intended to provide the driver
with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings as
well as a possible haptic warning in the form of a
brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated Ú page 431.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until
the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW setting menu can be adjusted through
the Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
To turn the FCW system on, select between
“Only Warning” and “Warning and Braking” in
the FCW menu.
Select “OFF” in the FCW menu to turn the FCW
system off.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system
from warning the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”,
“FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shutdown.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting, this allows the system to warn
the driver of a possible more distant colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. In rare
situations, the system may react to surrounding
objects such as tunnels, bridges, guardrails, etc.
The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking,
steering, and acceleration. Unintended braking
reactions can always be overridden by pressing
down hard on the accelerator. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or
death.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time than
the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
ence.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
this setting.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until
the tire is inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 391 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SAFETY 291
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be
on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value Ú page 431.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert or
Selectable Tire Fill Alert feature.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure TPMS
feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SAFETY
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire
Low" message for a minimum of five seconds, an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument cluster
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to
XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return
to their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system
fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the dashes.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SAFETY 293
A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With A Full-Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it has
a Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor,
and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped
with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare
tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire,
the next ignition switch cycle will still show the
TPMS Warning Light to be on, a chime to
sound, an Inflate to XX message to appear in
the instrument cluster, and the graphic display
will still show the low tire pressure value in a
different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS
Warning Light as long as none of road tires are
below the low pressure warning threshold.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel
and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS
sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and
tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as
long as no system fault exists.
TIRE FILL ALERT
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the
tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the
Tire Fill Alert feature in the customer settings menu
of the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using
the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
detects an increase in tire pressure while filling the
tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with
the transmission in PARK for vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, the parking
brake must be applied.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SAFETY
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps
do not come on while inflating the tire, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor may be in an
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle
may need to be moved slightly forward or
backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over-
filled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is
then underinflated and will continue to chirp
every five seconds if the user continues to
deflate the tire.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature is set to “Disabled” every
time the ignition is turned to “OFF”. To re-enable
the Tire Fill Alert feature at the next ignition “RUN”
state, the customer must re-enable the feature
through use of the customer settings in the radio.
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA) —
IF EQUIPPED
The STFA system is an optional feature that is
included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert system.
The system is designed to allow you to select a
pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and
rear axle tires to, and to provide feedback while
inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
NOTE:
To use the STFA feature, the Tire Fill Alert feature
must be enabled through use of the customer
settings in the radio.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system,
you will be able to select a pressure setting for both
the front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling
through a pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi
increments for each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for
the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle
placard pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for
each axle in the Uconnect system application as
preset pressure values. Up to two sets of preset
pressure values can be stored in the Uconnect
system for the front and rear axle. Once you select
the tire pressures for the front and rear axles that
you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin
inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPMS
receiver module detects a change in tire pressure.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the
transmission in PARK in vehicles with an automatic
transmission, and in NEUTRAL with the parking
brake engaged in vehicles with a manual
transmission. The hazard lamps will come on to
confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure screen will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. If the hazard lamps do not come on while
inflating or deflating the tire, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor may be in an
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle
may need to be moved slightly forward or
backward.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SAFETY 295
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the
following STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
pressure is reached to let you know when to
stop inflating or deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
over-inflated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is added or removed to reach proper selected
pressure level.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 314.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 314.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 428 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/
RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SAFETY 297
(Continued)
(Continued)
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SAFETY 299
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position
Ú page 322.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SAFETY 301
(Continued)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Two-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Four-Door Models)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SAFETY
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
WARNING!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SAFETY 303
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately Ú page 128.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SAFETY
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification
System (OCS) in the front passenger seat. The OCS
is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the
occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose
seated weight classifies them in a category other
than a properly seated adult. This could be a child,
teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator
Light (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger
when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illuminates
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
deploy during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy
even though the Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD)
System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SAFETY 305
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part
of a Federally regulated safety system for this
vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on
the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose
seated weight classifies them in a category other
than a properly seated adult. This could be a child,
teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Consists Of The Following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light – an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar
Air Bag Warning Light
Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat. The
Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat
cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be
sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from
the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s
most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC uses the classification to determine whether
it should activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. In order for the OCS to
operate as designed, it is important for the front
passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers
are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seat back and
the seat back in an upright position
Seated Properly
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has
very light objects in it.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child or small adult.
The front passenger is not properly seated or his
or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period
of time.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled
Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat*Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other
relatively light objects
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat**
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located on the
overhead sports bar) tells the driver and front
passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator light
illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
will not deploy during a collision. When the front
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects
are placed on the seat and the seat belt is
unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
will not deploy even though the PAD indicator light
is NOT illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated
when an adult passenger is properly seated in the
front passenger seat. The driver and adult
passenger should verify that the PAD Indicator
Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in
the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated
properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
may deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be
illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be
deactivated for most properly seated and restrained
children in the passenger seat and for most properly
installed child restraint systems. However, under
certain conditions, even with a properly installed
child restraint system, the PAD Indicator Light may
not be illuminated, even though the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can
occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest
weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator
Light. NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light
is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the
PAD Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An
Adult Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front
passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is
illuminated, the passenger may be sitting
improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the
OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight
to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult
passenger step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the
passenger seat, such as cushions, pads, seat
covers, seat massagers, blankets, extra
clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of
the seat, with the passenger’s feet
comfortably on or near the floor, and with their
back against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger
remain in this seated position for two to three
minutes after restarting the vehicle.
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated
for an adult passenger, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury or
death. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated
with the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF,"
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
deploy in the event of a collision.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SAFETY
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag may be deactivated.
Therefore, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
may or may not be activated for a lighter weight
passenger, including a small adult (depending on
size) who is seated in the passenger seat. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or
deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is
illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF” when an adult is in the front passenger seat,
have the passenger reposition his or her body in
the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event
of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front
Passenger’s Seated Weight On The Front
Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects. The
OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in
deactivation or activation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not
mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on
the front passenger seat may result in deactivation
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing
serious injury or death. Increasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger
seat may result in activation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper
front passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight
on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SAFETY 309
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate
whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
passenger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light does not come on, or stays on after you
start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight
input. This may result in serious injury or death
in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, which may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
WARNING!
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SAFETY
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to
properly classify the seated weight of a front seat
passenger, the OCS components must function as
designed. Do not make any modifications to the
front passenger seat components, assembly, or to
the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion
needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved
seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related
component or fastener be modified or replaced
with any part except those which are approved
by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when
the ignition is first turned on, stays on after
you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from
working properly, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any
objects on the floor under the front passenger
seat.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the
PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate to show that the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deacti-
vated. Should this occur, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deacti-
vated until the fault is cleared. This indicates
that you should take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for service immediately.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover, or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SAFETY 311
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as
the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blis-
tering, see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an autho-
rized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SAFETY 313
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the START or ON/OFF position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data
as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SAFETY 315
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SAFETY 317
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no”,
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SAFETY 319
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of
the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once
the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the
inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
Two Door Models – No
Center Seating Position
Four Door Models – Yes
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages are
18.5 inches (484 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat
if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door Models — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if it
interferes with the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see Ú page 48.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the
head restraint may be folded and the child seat
installed in front of it (Two-Door Models).
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion. If your
vehicle is equipped with anchorage symbols on the
seatback, they will be located just above the lower
anchorages.
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat, near the
floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used by
an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SAFETY 321
Four-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Two-Door Models:
Four-Door Models:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 322 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating
position. Do not use the center lower LATCH
anchorages to install a child seat in the center of
the back seat.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. If you are
installing LATCH-compatible child restraints next
to each other, you must use the seat belt for the
center position. You can then use either the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for
installing child seats in the outboard positions.
Please see Ú page 321 for typical installation
instructions.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SAFETY
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 325 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” Ú page 300 for additional information on
ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SAFETY 323
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Two-Door Models)
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Four-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the
head restraint may be folded and the child seat
installed in front of it (Two-Door Models).
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child
Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if it
interferes with the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see Ú page 48.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against
the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used by
an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SAFETY 325
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 325 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. For the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
Ú page 318.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SAFETY
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. If the seat can be moved,
you may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage
for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models With Center Armrest)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door
Without Center Armrest
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
head restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and
head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models Without Center Armrest)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the center tether anchorage
located on the back of the seat.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SAFETY 327
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 137.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes
on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. See Ú page 295 for further
information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor
mat that is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedal assemblies or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING!
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SAFETY 329
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking
for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if
gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid
leaks are suspected, the cause should be located
and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas,
which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed
area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked
vehicle with the engine running for an extended
period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area
with the engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to force
fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have
any abnormal conditions repaired promptly.
Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully
open.
6
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the instrument panel below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a
safety hazard warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
Assist and an SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 431.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a
built-in function. Other Uconnect services will
only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™
service is active and you are connected to an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
Assist Call
The Assist Button is used to automatically connect
you to any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
1 — Assist Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
(Continued)
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to an SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call
button on the overhead console or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termi-
nation of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED
light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn
green once a connection to an SOS operator
has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to an SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS
Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
7
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The light located within the Assist and SOS
buttons will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
tion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rear-
view Mirror light is illuminated, have an autho-
rized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An oper-
able LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
connection and a GPS signal is required for the
SOS Call system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into
PARK (P), or a manual transmission into
REVERSE (R).
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
7
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear
cargo area. To remove jack and tools proceed as
follows:
1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
Load Floor Handle
NOTE:
The load floor can be removed for easier access by
pulling the load floor handle up and directly
rearward.
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by
pinching the latch on the left side and pulling
upward.
Hardware Storage Cover Latch
3. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise to
loosen the jack from the storage bin.
Plastic Wing Nut Location
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
(Continued)
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier,
remove the tire cover, if equipped.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning the
lock bolt counterclockwise with the #T40 torx
head driver and ratchet from the supplied tool
kit.
Unlock Rear Camera Cover
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench
turning them counterclockwise. If equipped,
remove the locking lug nut with the lock key
(located in the glove box) turning it counter-
clockwise.
Removing The Spare Tire
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission to REVERSE.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
7
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from
the stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts
by turning them to the left one turn while the
wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect
the jack handle driver to the extension, then to
the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
NOTE:
If your vehicle comes with factory equipped
35 inch (88.9 centimeters) tires, a jack lift block is
provided in the rear cargo area. The jack lift block
is used to provide higher ground clearance when
changing a flat or spare tire. When placing the jack
lift block under the jack, be sure the bottom of the
jack fits securely inside of the raised edges of the
block.
Jack Lift Box Usage
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of
the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube,
as shown. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the
vehicle to prevent tool damage.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts
clockwise.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to
the counterclockwise, and remove the jack.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down
on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts
in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been
tightened twice Ú page 417. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with
a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at
a service station.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
7
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper
locations.
14. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the spare
tire carrier. Torque down lug nuts and locking
lug nut.
15. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on the
camera cover by turning the lock clockwise
using the provided #40 torx head driver and
ratchet. Then, reinstall the camera cover by
slipping it over the camera/tire carrier until it
snaps into place.
Lock Bolt Location
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
Supplemental Battery – If Equipped
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
WARNING!
Only use the positive battery post on the main
battery to jump start your vehicle. Serious
injury or death could result if you attempt to
jump start using the supplemental battery.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do
not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right
rear of the engine compartment.
Positive (+) Battery Post – Gas Engine
Positive (+) Battery Post – Diesel Engine
NOTE:
The positive (+) battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to
the post.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start
system, it will be equipped with two batteries
Ú page 165.
See the following steps to prepare for jump
starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) (manual
transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the
ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover
over the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
7
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system tested at an authorized dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission
into NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle
speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power out-
lets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis-
charge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the manual park release cover located
in front of the gear selector, to access the
release tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening in
the console base.
Tether Strap
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up until the release lever
locks into place in the vertical position. The
vehicle is now out of PARK (P) and can be
moved. Release the parking brake only when
the vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
Released Position
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it
from the “locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever
downward and to the left, into its original
position.
Reinstalling Tether
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console, and reinstall the cover.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the release position the
access cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. For
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or
SECOND (2) gear and REVERSE (R) (with manual
transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only
be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h)
or less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you
must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D)
or REVERSE (R).
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 277.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec-
onds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE,
do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
ring).
7
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described Ú page 198.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions
on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK
(P) in order to move the vehicle Ú page 341.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
Manual Transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)
Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in Forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on
the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK (P) (for automatic
transmissions) or in gear NOT in NEUTRAL, for
manual transmissions) Ú page 198.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is
towed with the ignition in the OFF mode. The only
approved method of towing without the key fob is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is
necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear fascia/bumpers.
Front Tow Hooks
Rear Tow Hook
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately
rated tow strap.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
7
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 313.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 314.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle. Tow straps are
recommended when towing the vehicle, chains
may cause vehicle damage.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
347
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING —
GASOLINE ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil”
or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster
display, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed
and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil
change is necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped
vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument
cluster odometer and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under Instrument Cluster Display for
further information Ú page 120.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check the engine oil level.
Check the windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage, rotate at the first sign
of irregular wear.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering, and
fill as needed.
Check the function of all interior and exterior
lights.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease; reapply if necessary.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, rear suspension, and replace
if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine.
1
X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine, intercooler (if equipped) coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or
more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
X X X X X
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Change front and rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
X X X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, to
reset the message Ú page 120.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or
12 months, whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the
housing when the new filter is installed if the
residual oil is not either removed from the housing
or enough time has not elapsed to allow the oil to
drain back into the engine. When servicing the oil
filter on this engine, open the filter cap
approximately six turns until the cap o-ring is
visible and stop. Wait five minutes with the cap in
this position to allow dirty engine oil to drain back
into the engine. After five minutes, the cap and
filter assembly can be removed and discarded.
When installing the new oil filter cartridge
assembly, ensure the cap is tightened to the
specified torque to prevent low oil pressure
conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN — DIESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change fuel filter.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter
assembly.
Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced every other oil change and
must not exceed 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5. If the vehicle is
being used in severe operating conditions, or in certain geographical areas of the country
(Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa,
Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel cleanliness issues, it is recommended to replace the fuel
filter every oil change and must not exceed 10,000 miles.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE — B6 TO B20 BIODIESEL
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six months, whichever comes first when using biodiesel blends
greater than 5% (B5).
The owner is required to monitor mileage for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change indicator system does not reflect the use of biofuels.
Fuel filter change interval is maintained at every second oil change. This is especially important with biodiesel usage.
For more information on using biodiesel Ú page 421.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Change transfer case fluid. X
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.6L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 11 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Pressure Cap— If Equipped
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to
minimize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
engine should be removed using compressed air
or an absorbent cloth.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and
the rear window washer (if equipped) is shared.
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When
refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to
minimize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
engine should be removed using compressed air
or an absorbent cloth.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water Ú page 338.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to
properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
If the negative battery cables are not isolated
properly it can cause a potential power spike
or surge in the system, resulting in damage to
essential electrical components.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For engine oil selection Ú page 424.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 348
for gasoline engines or Ú page 352 for diesel
engines.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
Mopar® filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement— Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals
as shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this
section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air
cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover
fasteners using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals
as shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this
section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air
cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage may result.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover
fasteners using a suitable tool.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
The fuel/water separator housing is located inside
the left frame rail in front of the fuel tank. The best
access to this water drain valve is from under the
vehicle.
If necessary remove the fuel filter protective cover
to access the water drain valve.
Fuel/Water Separator Filter
If water is detected in the water separator while the
engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light
will illuminate and an audible chime will be heard.
At this point you should stop the engine and drain
the water from the filter housing.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage may result.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
1 — Retainers
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
(Continued)
Fuel/Water Separator Filter
Within 10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the
filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter
housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/water;
allow the accumulated water to drain. Leave the
drain valve open until all water and contaminants
have been removed. When clear fuel is visible,
close the drain valve by turning it clockwise.
Upon proper draining of the water from fuel filter
assembly, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will
remain illuminated for approximately 10 seconds.
If the water was drained while the engine was
running, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light may
remain on for approximately three minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or government agency for advice on recy-
cling programs and for where used fluids and
filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
If more than two ounces or 60 ml of fuel have been
drained, follow the directions for Priming If The
Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel Ú page 364.
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT — DIESEL
E
NGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufac-
turer’s filtration and water separating require-
ments can severely impact fuel system life and reli-
ability. We recommend you use Mopar® Fuel Filter.
Must meet 3 micron rating.
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Remove the fuel filter protective cover to
access the fuel filter assembly.
Fuel Filter Assembly
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter during
this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
1 — Retainers
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
CAUTION!
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Place drain pan under the fuel filter assembly.
4. Open the water drain valve, and let any
accumulated water and fuel drain.
5. Close the water drain valve.
Fuel Filter Assembly
6. Wipe clean the underside of the filter housing
to prevent contamination from entering fuel
system during service.
7. Remove the fuel filter cap and filter from the
housing using a socket. Rotate counter-
clockwise for removal.
Fuel Filter Assembly
8. Remove the used fuel filter cartridge from the
cap and dispose of according to your local
regulations.
9. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the cap and
housing.
10. Lubricate o-ring on the cap with clean engine
oil.
11. Install the new fuel filter cartridge onto the
cap.
12. Insert the cap and filter into the housing with
clockwise rotation, use a socket to tighten.
13. Push the ignition switch twice without your foot
on the brake to place vehicle in RUN position.
This will activate the in tank fuel pump for
approximately 30 seconds. Repeat this
process twice to prime the fuel system. Start
the engine using the Normal Starting
procedure. After engine start, verify the fuel
filter cap does not leak.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank,
approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Push ignition switch twice without your foot on
brake to put vehicle in RUN position. This will
activate the in tank fuel pump for approxi-
mately 30 seconds. Repeat this process twice
to prime the fuel system.
1 — Water Drain Valve
1 — Fuel Filter Cap
2 — Socket Adapter
CAUTION!
Take care when handling the new fuel filter to
prevent contamination from entering the fuel
system.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
the engine running. Engine operation causes
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
cause serious injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting
procedure Ú page 143.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
NOTE:
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to sepa-
rate water from the fuel, resulting in high pres-
sure fuel system corrosion or damage.
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation
of your diesel engine.
For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar® Premium
Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recommended to
assist with cold starting.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
This engine meets all required diesel engine
emissions standards. To achieve these emissions
standards, your vehicle is equipped with a
state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These
systems are seamlessly integrated into your
vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine
combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst
to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you
to additional maintenance required on your vehicle
or engine.
Refer to Instrument Cluster Display for further
information Ú page 120.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known
simply by the name of its active component,
UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF
is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine
exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to convert
smog-forming Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) into harmless
nitrogen and water vapor.
For further information Ú page 424.
CAUTION!
The starter motor will engage for approximately
30 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes
between cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
conditions and be hazardous or explosive when
mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline,
the use of these fuels can cause damage to the
fuel system.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or oper-
ate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust sys-
tem can contact anything that can burn.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt, from rib to rib, are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace a belt. However, cracks
running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any
belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty informa-
tion.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop
and lower the door.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure
the air filter access door to the HVAC housing.
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet
housing. Pull the filter elements out pinching
them to the right for clearance.
Air Filter
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condition-
ing system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter
position indicators pointing in the same
direction as removal.
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure
retaining tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into
position ensuring you have properly engaged
the travel damper.
Travel Dampener
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
Ú page 348 for gasoline engines or Ú page 352
for diesel engines.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
damaged.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, push the release tab on the wiper blade
and while holding the wiper arm with one
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Open swing gate to access the wiper arm.
Rear Wiper Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate wiper
blade outward to disengage the wiper blade
from the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm
3. Gently set the arm on the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm and rotate
the wiper in to place.
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the tail
gate.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you
Ú page 327.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler
(if equipped), and Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (if
equipped) coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather,
where applicable). If the engine, battery (if
equipped), intercooler (if equipped), and MGU (if
equipped) coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or the back of the radiator core.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
WARNING!
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler
(if equipped), and MGU (if equipped) cooling
system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears,
cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
Ú page 348 for gasoline engines or Ú page 352
for diesel engines.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 424.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
(Continued)
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to mini-
mize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
engine should be removed using compressed
air or an absorbent cloth.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact an authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if so
equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
OAT or HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring
proper disposal. Check with your local authorities
to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested, seek emergency
assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method
for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant should be within the OK range
between the ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the
engine coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant
bottle without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the
coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 348.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid
is abnormally low, check the system for leaks
Ú page 426.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch
(3 mm) below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported
by the axles.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the
level specified above.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer recommended fluid
Ú page 426.
WARNING!
Use only the manufacturer recommended
brake fluid Ú page 426. Using the wrong type
of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in an open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position.
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 348.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid
Ú page 426.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The
fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill
hole and a point not more than 3/16 of an inch
(4.76 mm) below the bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid
becomes contaminated with water, it should be
changed immediately. Otherwise, change the fluid
as recommended in the Maintenance Plan. Refer
to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 348.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended manual
transmission fluid Ú page 426.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product
and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any
fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
1 — Fill hole
2 — Drain hole
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer specified
transmission fluid Ú page 426. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
FUSES
General Information
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder Ú page 426.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate-
rial. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays.
The PDC top cover is labeled with each serviceable
fuse/relay location, function, and size.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, gearbox system) or
steering system blows, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
Power Distribution Center Location – Gasoline Engine
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location – Diesel Engine
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
F04 –
20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
25 Amp Clear Fuel Pmp (6.4)*
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare
F07 – 15 Amp Blue Low Temp Radiator Cooling Pump (LTR)*
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare
F10 – 15 Amp Blue
Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub (RF HUB)/
Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty
Electrical Pkg (SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F22 – 10 Amp Red
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module
(PCM)/Motor Generator Unit (MGU) WAKE UP/Power Pack
Unit (PPU) WAKE UP
F23 – 10 Amp Red
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module
(ECM)
F24 – – Spare
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL MOD)/
Steering Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant Classification Module
(OCM)/Driver Presence Detection Module (DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red
ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module (IRCM)/
Airbag Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power
Steering (EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP*
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW ELEC BRK MOD*
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W*
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
F39 – 15 Amp Blue MGU Coolant Pump (3.6)*
F40 – 15 Amp Blue
DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC)
FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – 10 Amp Red Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)*
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC*
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Digital TV (DSRC)/USB/InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/
Compass Module (CSGM)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – – Spare
F54 – – Spare
F55 – 10 Amp Red Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR/PTC HTR COIL FEED
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Driver Heated Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Pass Heated Seat
F59 – – Spare
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR WHEEL)
F61 – 10 Amp Red Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor (RBSS)
F62 –
– Spare
10 Amp Red Exhaust Sol*
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR Front
F67 – – Spare
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 5 Amp Tan Motor Generator Unit MGU Belt Starter Generator (BSG)*
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG*
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
F75 – 10 Amp Red
Power Pack Unit - Battery Pack Control Module & Auxiliary
Power Module (PPU-BPCM & APM) Belt Starter Generator
(BSG)*
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red HEATED MIRRORS
F78 – 10 Amp Red INTRUSION MOD/SIREN/INTRUSION SENSORS
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 –
15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM) / SOL 1,2 BLOCK SHIFT
10 Amp Red Vapor Blocking Valve (BSG)
F81 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost (Electric Backlight *
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR*
F83 60 Amp Yellow – GLOW PLUG*
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT*
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR*
F86 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP 2*
F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP*
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/ #2*
F89 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/ Cruise Control
(CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV (DTV) / EVIC / Airbag Disable Lamp
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP*
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2*
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1*
F94 – – Spare
F95 – – Spare
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3*
F104 – 15 Amp Blue PPU COOL PUMP*
F105 – 10 Amp Red
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioning (HVAC)
F106 50 Amp Red – ESC -PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT*
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4*
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT*
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed when the ignition in ON.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP*
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe) **
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7444NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NALL/WY21WLL
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443LL
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License Lamp LED
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer
to the applicable Service Manual.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to
change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will
usually accelerate the clearing process.
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers
along the top a quarter turn counterclockwise
and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at
one side and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the
headlamp to the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grab the bulb and rotate a quarter turn
counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock
position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push
the connector locking tab to the lock position.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a
quarter turn clockwise.
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
access bulb sockets.
Wheel Liner
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove from housing.
Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
replace.
LED FRONT SIDE MARKER — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
access side maker screw and electrical
connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the
front side maker assembly and disconnect
electrical connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker
light assembly.
HALOGEN FRONT FOG LAMP — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of
the front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from
the front fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grab the bulb by the two latch features
and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb
from the back of the front fog lamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
opening in the housing and then connect the
replacement bulb.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they
are replaced as an assembly.
REAR TAIL, STOP, TURN SIGNAL, AND BACKUP
LAMP — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access
single retaining screw for tail lamp assembly.
Trim Cap
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect
electrical connector, then remove tail lamp
assembly from the vehicle.
NOTE:
If necessary, push in on the assembly tab located
inboard behind the lamp housing.
Retaining Screw
3. Remove the three screws from assembly
bracket to access bulb sockets.
Assembly Bracket
4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter turn
counterclockwise, then remove it from the
housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
replace.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP
(CHMSL) — IF EQUIPPED
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that
extends upward from the swing gate behind the
spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the LED
Assembly from an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier
cover.
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly and
disconnect electrical connector.
LICENSE PLATE LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
NOTE:
To install a new bulb, reverse the procedure above.
When installing the new bulb, care should be taken
to not allow bare skin to come in contact with the
bulb.
See an authorized dealer to replace LED lamps.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú page 191.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 191.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lb (392 kg).
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire
is changed after driving with underinflated tire
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a colli-
sion. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four.
Never combine them with other types of tires.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under run
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
for more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 343.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
For further information Ú page 401.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Fail-
ure to follow this warning can result in sudden
tire failure. You could lose control and have a
collision resulting in serious injury or death.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
(Continued)
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to
the Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 392.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING!
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 195.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tempo-
rary emergency use only. With these spares, do
not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo-
rary use spares have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Sport
Rear
245/75R17 S Class or Autosock
Willy’s LT255/75R17C
Autosock
Sahara 255/70R18
Rubicon LT285/70R17C
High Altitude 275/55R20
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
CAUTION!
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
CAUTION!
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 348.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the transfer case.
Tire rotation schedule should be followed to
balance tire wear.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
(Continued)
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start
system then disconnect both the main and
supplemental negative battery cables.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to
properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated
properly it can cause a potential power spike or
surge in the system, resulting in damage to
essential electrical components.
WARNING!
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
If assistance is needed to disconnect the
battery system, see an authorized dealer.
Battery Cable Disconnect
NOTE:
You must isolate the supplemental battery
connection point, as well as the main battery
terminal from the post, as shown in the image,
to fully de-energize both batteries for storage. If
assistance is needed to disconnect the battery
system, see an authorized dealer.
Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS), or your Stop/Start system may not func-
tion for up to 24 hours, due to the IBS being set
into learn mode.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
4 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of
such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible. The cost of such repairs is consid-
ered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's
interior trim and top, follow these precautions:
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
result.
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the
top down, as exposure to sun or rain may
damage interior trim.
Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents
on top material, as damage may result.
Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and
dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always
make sure it is completely dry before lowering.
Be especially careful when washing the
windows by following the directions for “Care of
Fabric Top Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar® Car Wash or equivalent, or
mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with
soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use
Mopar® Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire
top, but support the top from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water.
Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic
windows which can be scratched unless special
care is taken by following these directions:
Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead,
use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moist-
ened with cold or warm, clean water, and wipe
across the window, not up and down. Mopar®
Jeep® Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent
will safely clean all plastic windows without
scratching. It removes fine scratches to improve
visibility and provides UV protection to help
prevent yellowing.
When washing, never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents
such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then
wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a
scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water
only if you must clean the window quickly.
Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from
off-road driving will have an impact on plastic
retainer operation. Even normal on-road driving
and vehicle washing will eventually impact
window plastic retainer operation. To maintain
ease of use of the window plastic retainers,
each window plastic retainer should be cleaned
and lubricated regularly. Clean them with a mild
soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning prod-
ucts are available through an authorized dealer.
Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any
tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to
remove and may damage the windows.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains, or mildew of the
top material:
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic
car wash. Window scratches and wax build-up
may result.
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicle’s interior.
Use care when washing the vehicle, water
pressure directed at the weather strip seals
may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
Careless handling and storage of the remov-
able roof panels may damage the seals,
causing water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-
rior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes in
washing stations. Wash the vehicle only by
hand using neutral pH detergents; dry it with a
wet chamois leather. Abrasive products and/
or polishes should not be used for cleaning
the car. Bird droppings must be washed off
immediately and thoroughly as the acid they
contain is particularly aggressive.
Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle
under trees; remove vegetable resins immedi-
ately as, when dried, it may only be possible to
remove them with abrasive products and/or
polishes, which is highly inadvisable as they
could alter the typical opaqueness of the
paint.
Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for
cleaning the front windshield and rear
window; dilute it min. 50% with water. Only
use pure windshield washer fluid when strictly
necessary due to outside temperature condi-
tions.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
(Continued)
INTERIORS
CARPET SAFETY INFORMATION
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use carpet that does not interfere with the
operation of the pedal assemblies. Only operate
the vehicle when the carpet is securely attached by
the grommets so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedal assemblies or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
CARPET REMOVAL
Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):
1. Remove the front grommets.
Front Carpet
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
Front Carpet Pulled Away
WARNING!
If operating the vehicle without carpet in place
the floor may become hot, and there is a risk
of burns.
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
damaged grommets may cause your carpet to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS
securely attach your carpet using the grom-
mets.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the carpet
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the carpet and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
ONLY install carpet designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install carpet that cannot be
properly attached and secured to your vehicle.
If the carpet needs to be replaced, only use
manufacturer approved carpet for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check that the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
WARNING!
1 — Grommets
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat.
First for the rear carpet and then the front
carpet.
Front And Rear Carpet Split
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the
carpet split and then pull out the rear edge and
slide the carpet to the front (do not remove the
harness).
Rear Underside Of Front Seat
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat
bracket and then remove the last two
grommets.
Front Seat And Floor
6. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar,
console, and refasten grommets.
1 — Harness
2 — Carpet Split
1 — Grommets
2 — Carpet Split
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
Rear Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat
(one left and one right).
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open
the carpet split around the front seats
brackets.
Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle
3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right). First the grommet for
the cargo carpet and then the rear carpet.
4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the
carpet split around the rear seats brackets.
Under Rear Seat
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar,
console, and refasten grommets.
Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the rear seats.
2. Remove the side grommets (one left and one
right). First the grommet from the side carpet
and then the rear carpet.
Side Carpet
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat
(one left and one right).
1 — Carpet Split
1 — Carpet Split
1 — Grommet
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and open
the carpet split around the front seats
brackets.
Pull Carpet To The Rear
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar,
console, and refasten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the
carpet split around the seat belt attachment.
Under Rear Seat
3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and
the side support and then pull the carpet out.
Rear Load Floor
4. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar,
console, and refasten grommets.
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
1 — Side Supports
2 — Load Floor
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap Hider:
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the
carpet split around the seat belt attachment
and under the center seat bracket.
Under Rear Seat
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar,
console, and refasten grommets.
Side Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommets (one left and one
right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange,
then all around the perimeter and open the
carpet split around the seat belt attachment.
Inside Sidewall
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar,
console, and refasten grommets.
Side Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet and then the lower
one (left and right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange,
then all around the perimeter and open the
carpet split around the seat belt attachment.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar,
console, and refasten grommets.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Grommets
3 — Rear Carpet
1 — Top Flange
2 — Grommet
3 — Side Carpet
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
8
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or
if the buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends
Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a
cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
417
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
A-pillar, visible from outside of the vehicle through
the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off)
the brakes will still function. However, the effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Spare Tire Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier
located on the swing gate.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
59 Ft-Lb
(80 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
9
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with an octane number lower than
recommended octane can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance, when using high-quality
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating
of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will
allow these engines to operate to optimal
performance. This increase in performance is most
noticeable in hot weather or other heavier load
conditions, such as while towing.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of higher octane premium gasoline will not provide
any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 419
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
sion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle
with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm
Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur
maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions
control system.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM (formerly
known as the American Society for Testing and
Materials) specification D-975 Grade S15 will
provide good performance. If the vehicle is
exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or
is required to operate at colder-than-normal
conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized
No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with
50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better
protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the
fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To
prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
accumulated water from the fuel/water separator
using the fuel/water separator drain provided on
the fuel filter housing. If you buy good quality fuel
and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel
conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
If available in your area, a high cetane “premium”
diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and
warm-up performance.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
conditions and hazardous or explosive when
mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START engine before you drain the water
from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage
Ú page 362.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 421
DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
This diesel engine has been developed to take
advantage of the high energy content and
generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel
fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized diesel
fuels.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline
on your diesel vehicle, do not start the engine.
Damage to the engine and fuel system could
occur. Please call an authorized dealer for
service.
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your diesel engine without any adjustments to
regular service schedules.
Commercially available fuel additives are not
necessary for the proper operation of your
diesel engine.
No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only be
used where extended arctic conditions (-10°F
or -23°C) exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D975 is recommended for use with
your diesel engine. If frequent operation with
Biodiesel blends that are between 6% and 20%
(B6–B20) is desired, the maintenance schedule is
subject to shorter intervals.
The oil and filter change along with fuel filter
replacement is subject to shorter intervals when
operating your engine on biodiesel greater than
5%. Do not use biodiesel greater than 20%.
For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6%
and 20% (B6–B20) it is important that you
understand and comply with these requirements
Ú page 352.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
resources typically derived from animal fat,
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base),
or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or SOME)
base).
Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which
require that you understand and adhere to the
following requirements if you use blends of
Biodiesel between 6% and 20% (B6–B20). There
are no unique restrictions for the use of B5.
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for both
storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as
storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated
storage tank, or using cold temperature additives.
CAUTION!
Failure to comply with Oil Change requirements
for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends
between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) will result in
premature engine wear. Such wear is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved.
Use of blends greater than 20% can result in
engine damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
In the event that the vehicle is filled with
biodiesel and not used for more than a month,
the fuel should either be used up by driving (up
to quarter tank) and filled with standard diesel
blends with less than 5% that is normally
available. This will help prevent the fuel filter
clogging and potential damage to the fuel
injection system due to degraded biodiesel,
which is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
9
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM
Standards
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only
fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the
following specifications may be blended to meet
Biodiesel blend B6 – B20 fuel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-975 and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM
specification D-6751
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored
properly, provides for protection against fuel
oxidation for up to six months.
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
Mopar® Approved Fuel Filter Elements
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar®
filtration system is designed to provide adequate
fuel water separation capabilities.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed
with the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not
exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil
change interval must be maintained with in the
suggested schedule. The regular use of biodiesel
between 6% and 20% requires intervals shorter
than the outlined 10,000 miles (16,000 km)and
must not exceed the suggested schedule. When
routinely operating on biodiesel between 6% and
20%, oil and filter replacement intervals must not
exceed 8,000 Miles (12,875 km) or six months,
which ever comes first.
Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel
filter change intervals. When operating on
biodiesel between 6% and 20%, fuel filter
replacement intervals should be every second oil
change, and must not exceed 16,000 miles
(25,750 km).
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
6 months, if regular operation occurs with 6% -
20% biodiesel blends. Under no circumstances
should fuel filter replacement intervals exceed
every second oil change and must not exceed
16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation
occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure to
comply with these Oil Change and fuel filter
requirements for vehicles operating on biodiesel
blends up to B20 may result in premature engine
wear. Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. The engine may suffer severe
damage if operated with concentrations of
biodiesel higher than 20%.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 423
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models 17.5 Gallons 66 Liters
Four Door Models 21.5 Gallons 81 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 18.3 Gallons 69 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.1 Gallons 19.3 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 9 Quarts 8.5 Liters
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
2.0L Engine Intercooler 3.7 Quarts 3.5 Liters
3.6L Engine 13.4 Quarts 12.7 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) 2.2 Quarts 2.1 Liters
3.6L Power Pack Unit (PPU) Coolant 3.3 Quarts 3.1 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 14.8 Quarts 14 Liters
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
GASOLINE ENGINES
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Intercooler
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full
Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine
oil can be used but must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 360.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause
engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 360.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 425
DIESEL ENGINES
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.0L Diesel Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine
Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS-12991. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-40 engine oil can be used but
must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 360.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Diesel Engine
We recommend using Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a
fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
9
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Diesel Engine
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal
law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway
Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the
emissions control system. For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel fuel
meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM
specification D-975 with your diesel engine.
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no
greater than 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the
shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid — 3.0L Diesel Engine
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (API Certified) or equivalent that has been
API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO
22241 may result in system damage.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Differential We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 427
Rear Axle Differential (M200 Sales Code DRZ)
We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140)
(API GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)
We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5).
Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction
modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
9
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized
dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may
contact FCA US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 429
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with the manufacturer
by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after FCA US
LLC’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/
om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR
®
PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 431
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .........................................417
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)................................................ 169 , 171
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............372
Adding Fuel .......................................... 186 , 187
Additives, Fuel ...............................................418
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................248
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
......................................304
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 302 , 305
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 313, 346
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................346
Front Air Bag ................................... 303 , 305
If Deployment Occurs ................................312
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................310
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............313
Maintenance .............................................313
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............303
Transporting Pets ......................................327
Air Bag Light ............................... 128 , 302, 327
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter)
.............................................................360
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................366
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 366 , 367
Air Conditioner System ..................................366
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................68 , 367
Air Conditioning System ...................................67
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................68
Air Filter ........................................................ 360
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 398
Alarm
Arm The System
..........................................24
Disarm The System .....................................24
Security Alarm ....................................24 , 131
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................11
Android Auto ........................................ 250 , 251
Android Auto™
S
........................................ 250
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 372 , 423
Disposal ................................................... 373
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 275
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 131
Apple CarPlay ....................................... 250 , 253
Apple CarPlay®
S
...................................... 252
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 280
Audio Settings ............................................... 234
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 207
Auto Down Power Windows .............................75
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................51
Automatic Door Locks ......................................28
Automatic Headlights .......................................58
Automatic High Beams .....................................58
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............67
Automatic Transmission ................................ 153
Adding Fluid .............................................. 377
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 377
Fluid Change ............................................. 377
Fluid Level Check ............................. 376 , 377
Fluid Type ........................................ 377 , 426
Gear Ranges ............................................. 153
Special Additives ...................................... 376
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 156
AutoPark ....................................................... 140
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........71
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................71
Auxiliary Switches ............................................73
Axle Fluid....................................................... 426
Axle Lock ..............................................161 , 162
B
Battery ................................................. 129 , 358
Charging System Light .............................. 129
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................17
Belts, Seat .................................................... 327
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 284
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
433
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................243
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................368
B-Pillar Location .............................................395
Brake Assist System ......................................276
Brake Control System ....................................276
Brake Fluid .......................................... 375 , 426
Brake System ...................................... 374 , 417
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................417
Fluid Check ...............................................375
Master Cylinder .........................................375
Parking ......................................................148
Warning Light ............................................128
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................153
Bulb Replacement ............................... 387 , 389
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 329 , 387
Bumper End Cap Removal .............................201
C
Camera, Rear ................................................184
Capacities, Fluid ............................................423
Caps, Filler
Fuel
...........................................................186
Oil (Engine) ................................................355
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................373
Car Washes ...................................................409
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................329
Cargo Area Cover ...........................................114
Cargo Load Floor ...........................................114
Cargo Tie-Downs ........................................... 114
Carpeting ...................................................... 411
CD................................................................. 236
Cellular Phone .............................................. 272
Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 390
Certification Label ......................................... 191
Chains, Tire ................................................... 405
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 392
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)
............................................................. 138
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 327
Checks, Safety .............................................. 327
Child Restraint .............................................. 314
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
........................................... 317
Child Seat Installation .............................. 324
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 322
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 316
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 320
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 318
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 316
Seating Positions ...................................... 317
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 418
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 404
Climate Control
Automatic ....................................................62
Manual ........................................................65
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 141
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 403
Connected Services ...................................... 254
Connected Services FAQ ............................... 267
Connected Services Features ....................... 257
Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 256
Connected Services, Introduction ................. 254
Connector
UCI
...............................................................69
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .............69
Console ............................................................69
Floor ............................................................69
Contract, Service ........................................... 429
Controls ........................................................ 227
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 373
Cooling System ............................................. 371
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 372
Coolant Level ............................................ 373
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 423
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 373
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 372
Inspection ........................................371 , 373
Points To Remember ................................ 374
Pressure Cap ............................................ 373
Radiator Cap ............................................. 373
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
.........................372 , 423, 424
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 408
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .............169 , 171
Cruise Light .......................................... 136 , 137
11
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434
Customer Assistance
.....................................428
Customer Programmable Features ................208
Cybersecurity .................................................207
D
Daytime Running Lights ................................... 58
Dealer Service ...............................................359
Defroster, Windshield ....................................327
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .............................. 60
Deleting A Phone ...........................................243
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................137
Diesel
Display Messages
........................... 126 , 127
Diesel Fuel .....................................................420
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................420
Bulk Storage Of .........................................188
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................364
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ..................................................... 58
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ................................................358
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................344
Disc Drive ......................................................236
Disconnecting ................................................243
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................373
Disturb...........................................................246
Door Ajar.............................................. 129 , 130
Door Ajar Light ..................................... 129 , 130
Door Frame ................................................... 106
Installation ............................................... 106
Removal ................................................... 106
Door Locks
Automatic
....................................................28
Door Off Mirror Kit ...........................................34
Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped
S
..............34
Doors ...............................................................25
Removal ...............................................29 , 32
Removal, Front ............................................29
Removal, Rear .............................................32
Drag & Drop .................................................. 225
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............ 362
Driver Memory Presets ................................. 233
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...............................43 , 44
Driving .......................................................... 200
E
Electric Brake Control System ....................... 276
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 275
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 276 , 284
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................53
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........71
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................71
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 277
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 129
Emergency
In Case Of ................................................. 330
SOS Emergency Call ................................. 330
Emergency Brake .......................................... 148
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking...................................................... 333
Jump Starting ........................................... 338
Tow Hooks ................................................ 345
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 138
Engine ........................................................... 355
Air Cleaner ................................................ 360
Block Heater ............................................. 143
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 147
Checking Oil Level .................................... 358
Compartment .........................355 , 356, 357
Compartment Identification ....355, 356, 357
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 424
Cooling...................................................... 371
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 329
Fails To Start ............................................. 142
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 142
Fuel Requirements .......................... 418 , 423
Idling......................................................... 145
Jump Starting ........................................... 338
Oil ...........................................360 , 423, 424
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 355
Oil Filter .................................................... 360
Oil Reset ................................................... 121
Oil Selection..................................... 360 , 423
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 360
Overheating .............................................. 341
Starting ..................................................... 139
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 313 , 346
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
435
Ethanol
..........................................................419
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................................329
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................................329
Exhaust System ................................... 329 , 370
Exterior Lights .........................................57 , 329
F
Fabric Care
....................................................409
Fabric Top ......................................................409
Family Alerts ..................................................266
Filters
Air Cleaner
.................................................360
Air Conditioning ..................................68 , 367
Engine Fuel ...............................................362
Engine Oil ........................................ 360 , 424
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................360
Flashers
Hazard Warning
.........................................330
Turn Signal ................................................329
Turn Signals ........................... 136 , 389, 390
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 58
Flat Tire Changing ................................ 391 , 402
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 391 , 402
Flooded Engine Starting ................................142
Fluid Capacities .............................................423
Fluid Leaks ....................................................329
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission ................................376
Fluid Level Checks ........................................ 375
Brake........................................................ 375
Engine Oil ................................................. 358
Fluid, Brake .................................................. 426
Fog Lights ..................................................... 389
Fog Lights, Service ........................................ 389
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat .............................45
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................43
Folding Rear Seats ...........................................45
Folding Windshield ....................................... 109
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 288
Four Wheel Drive .......................................... 157
Operation ................................................. 157
Shifting ..................................................... 157
System ..................................................... 157
Four Wheel Drive Operation .......................... 159
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 330
Freedom Panels ...............................................96
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 343
Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 375
Fuel...................................................... 418 , 420
Adding ............................................. 186 , 187
Additives ................................................... 418
Clean Air ................................................... 418
Ethanol ..................................................... 419
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 186
Filter ......................................................... 362
Gasoline ................................................... 418
Materials Added ....................................... 418
Methanol .................................................. 419
Octane Rating ..................................418 , 424
Requirements .................................. 420 , 423
Specifications .................................. 421 , 424
Tank Capacity ........................................... 423
Fueling .................................................186 , 187
Fuses ............................................................ 377
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.....................53
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................... 186 , 187
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 418
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 418
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 418
Gauges
Voltage
...................................................... 144
Gear Ranges ........................................150 , 153
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 416
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 192
GVWR ............................................................ 191
H
Half-Door Installation .......................................36
Half-Door Installation — If Equipped
S
..........36
Hard Top ..........................................................76
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal
S
..............93
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 330
Head Restraints ...............................................48
11
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436
Headlights
Automatic
.................................................... 58
Bulb Replacement .....................................389
Cleaning ....................................................408
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .......... 58
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 59
Passing........................................................ 58
Replacing ..................................................389
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 53
Heated Seats ................................................... 47
Heated Steering Wheel .................................... 42
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch
..............................................................58
Hill Descent Control .......................................279
Hill Descent Control Indicator ........................279
Hill Start Assist ..............................................280
Hitches
Trailer Towing
............................................193
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 53
Hood Prop......................................................112
Hood Release ................................................112
I
Ignition
............................................................ 19
Switch ......................................................... 19
In Case Of Emergency ...................................330
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................... 51
Instrument Cluster ........................................ 116
Descriptions ............................................. 136
Display...................................................... 120
Engine Oil Reset ....................................... 121
Menu Items .............................................. 122
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 416
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ................. 378
Interior And Instrument Lights .........................59
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 411
Interior Lights ...................................................59
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................60
Intervention Regeneration Strategy .............. 365
Inverter
Power ..........................................................72
J
Jack Location
................................................ 334
Jack Operation .............................................. 335
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 335
Jump Starting ............................................... 338
K
Key Fob
Arm The System ..........................................24
Disarm The System .....................................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............18
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................17
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry)
...............................................................18
Keyless Enter'n Go™ ........................................26
Passive Entry ...............................................26
Keys .................................................................16
Replacement ...............................................18
L
Lane Change Assist
..........................................59
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 296
Latches ......................................................... 329
Hood ................................................ 112 , 130
Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 329
Life Of Tires ................................................... 400
Light Bulbs ...........................................329 , 387
Lights ............................................................ 329
Air Bag ....................................128 , 302, 327
Automatic Headlights ..................................58
Brake Assist Warning ................................ 279
Brake Warning .......................................... 128
Bulb Replacement ........................... 387 , 389
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 390
Cruise ..............................................136 , 137
Daytime Running .........................................58
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................58
Electric Power Steering ............................. 129
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator ......................................130 , 131
Exterior .............................................. 57 , 329
Fog............................................................ 389
Fuel Filler Cap ........................................... 132
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 330
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
437
Headlights
.................................................389
High Beam .................................................. 58
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 58
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................279
Interior ........................................................ 59
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 59
Low Fuel ....................................................132
Low Washer Fluid ......................................132
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......132
Oil Temperature ........................................130
Park...........................................................136
Passing........................................................ 58
Rear Servicing ...........................................390
Rear Tail Lamps ........................................390
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................130
Security Alarm ...........................................131
Service ............................................ 387 , 389
Side Marker...............................................390
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...............290
Traction Control .........................................279
Transmission Temperature .......................131
Turn Signal ................................................329
Turn Signals ........................... 136 , 389, 390
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
................................ 130 , 136
Load Floor, Cargo ..........................................114
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................125
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................125
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............125
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............125
Loading Vehicle ............................................ 191
Tires ......................................................... 395
Locking
Axle.................................................. 161 , 162
Locks
Automatic Door
............................................28
Child Protection ...........................................28
Power Door ..................................................26
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 290
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
Position
S
.....................................................76
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 368
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 417
Luggage Carrier ............................................ 114
M
Maintenance
................................................. 102
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 358
Maintenance Schedule ........................ 347 , 351
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) ................................................ 132 , 138
Manual
Park Release ............................................ 341
Service ..................................................... 430
Manual Transmission .......................... 149 , 376
Fluid Level Check ..................................... 376
Lubricant Selection ......................... 376 , 426
Shift Speeds ............................................. 150
Media Mode .................................................. 236
Methanol ...................................................... 419
Mirrors .............................................................51
Automatic Dimming .....................................51
Electric Powered ..........................................53
Electric Remote ...........................................53
Heated .........................................................53
Outside ........................................................52
Rearview ......................................................51
Vanity...........................................................52
Mobile App .................................................... 256
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
.........................................................11
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 290
Mopar Parts .................................................. 430
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 147
O
Occupant Restraints
..................................... 295
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............. 418, 424
Off Road Pages ............................................. 272
Accessory Gauges ............................272 , 274
Drivetrain .........................................272 , 273
Pitch And Roll .................................. 272 , 274
Status Bar........................................ 272 , 273
Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 360
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 360
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 130
Oil Reset ....................................................... 121
Oil, Engine ............................................360 , 424
11
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438
Capacity
....................................................423
Checking ...................................................358
Dipstick .....................................................358
Disposal ....................................................360
Filter ................................................ 360 , 424
Filter Disposal ...........................................360
Identification Logo .....................................360
Materials Added To ...................................360
Pressure Warning Light .............................130
Recommendation ............................ 360 , 423
Synthetic ...................................................360
Viscosity ....................................................423
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................137
Operating Precautions ...................................137
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
........................................430
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 52
Overheating, Engine ......................................341
P
Paddle Shifters ..............................................156
Paint Care ......................................................408
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
S
......................................................241
Parking Brake ................................................148
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................180
Passive Entry ................................................... 26
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................225
Pets ...............................................................327
Phone Mode ..................................................239
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 395
Power
Brakes
...................................................... 417
Door Locks ..................................................26
Inverter ........................................................72
Mirrors .........................................................53
Steering .................................................... 164
Windows ......................................................75
Power Sliding Top ......................................... 102
Operation ................................................. 102
Pinch Protect ............................................ 102
Quarter Window Removal ......................... 104
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 426
Power Top Quarter Windows ......................... 104
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 300
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 333
Presets ......................................................... 233
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 300
R
Radial Ply Tires
............................................. 399
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........... 373
Radio
Presets
..................................................... 233
Radio Controls .............................................. 227
Radio Mode .................................................. 227
Radio Operation ................................... 227 , 272
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 226
Raising The Soft Top
S
.................................87
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 375
Rear Camera ................................................. 184
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 287
Rear ParkSense System ................................ 180
Rear Seat Reminder Alert ............................. 282
Rear Swing Gate ........................................... 113
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................61
Recreational Towing ...................................... 198
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 199
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)
............................................ 200
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 418
Refrigerant .................................................... 367
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 255
Release, Hood ............................................... 112
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 296
Remote Control
Starting System
...........................................21
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ... 261, 267
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 262
Remote Features, Starting ................... 261 , 269
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm
.............................................24
Disarm The Alarm ........................................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............18
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 226
Remote Start (Diesel) .......................................23
Remote Start (Gas) ..........................................21
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
439
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode
.............................. 22
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features.................................................. 22
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 22
Remote Starting System ........................... 21 , 23
Removable Doors ..................................... 29 , 32
Front............................................................ 29
Rear ............................................................ 32
Removable Top ..............................................102
Removing The Soft Top
S
............................. 90
Replacement Bulbs .......................................387
Replacement Keys ........................................... 18
Replacement Tires .........................................401
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................430
Restraints, Child ............................................314
Restraints, Head .............................................. 48
Roadside Assistance ........................... 262 , 268
Roll Over Warning ............................................ 10
Roof Type Carrier ...........................................114
Rotation, Tires ...............................................406
S
Safety
............................................................225
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................327
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................329
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................430
Safety Features .............................................225
Safety Information, Tire .................................391
Safety Tips .....................................................327
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 329
Satellite Radio .............................................. 228
Saved Radio Stations ................................... 233
Schedule, Maintenance ....................... 347 , 351
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 130
Seat Belts ............................................ 296 , 327
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 299
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 299
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................ 299
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 300
Child Restraints ........................................ 314
Energy Management Feature ................... 300
Extender ................................................... 300
Front Seat........................................ 296 , 298
Inspection................................................. 327
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 298
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 299
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 296
Operating Instructions .............................. 298
Pregnant Women ...................................... 300
Pretensioners ........................................... 300
Rear Seat ................................................. 296
Reminder.................................................. 296
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 300
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 300
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 299
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 415
Seats................................................................43
Adjustment ..................................................43
Fold And Tumble Rear .................................45
Heated .........................................................47
Height Adjustment .......................................43
Rear Folding ................................................43
Tilting ...........................................................43
Security Alarm ........................................ 24 , 131
Arm The System ...........................................24
Disarm The System ......................................24
Selec - Speed Control .................................... 282
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 424
Send & Go ............................................263 , 268
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................18
Sentry Key Replacement ..................................18
Service Assistance ........................................ 428
Service Contract ............................................ 429
Service Manuals ........................................... 430
Settings ......................................................... 207
Settings, Audio .............................................. 234
Shifting.......................................................... 151
Automatic Transmission .................. 151 , 153
Manual Transmission ............................... 149
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
................................... 199
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ................................... 200
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 296
Side Step Removal ........................................ 200
11
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440
Signals, Turn
......................136 , 329, 389, 390
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................228
Favorites ...................................................231
Replay .......................................................230
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
..........................................231
Favorites ...................................................231
Replay .......................................................230
Smart Watch ..................................................267
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................405
Snow Tires .....................................................402
Soft Top .................................................... 76 , 84
Soft Top Windows ............................................ 84
SOS Call............................................... 257 , 267
Spare Tires ................................. 335 , 402, 403
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................................424
Oil..............................................................424
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
...............................................171
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................175
Cancel .......................................................171
Resume .....................................................171
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................171
Starting ................................................ 139 , 142
Automatic Transmission .................. 139 , 143
Button ......................................................... 19
Cold Weather ............................................141
Engine Block Heater ..................................143
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 142
Manual Transmission ............................... 139
Remote........................................................21
Starting And Operating .................................. 139
Starting Procedures ............................. 139 , 142
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ........... 142
Steering ...........................................................42
Power ....................................................... 164
Tilt Column ..................................................42
Wheel, Heated .............................................42
Wheel, Tilt....................................................42
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 226
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 226
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 264 , 269
Stop/Start ............................................ 165 , 167
Storage ............................................69 , 84, 104
Behind the Seat ...........................................69
Storage, Vehicle ............................................ 407
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 233
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 407
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 343
Sun Roof ....................................................... 102
Sunrider® For Hard Top ...................................99
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic
................................................. 162
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 284
Swing Gate, Rear .......................................... 113
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 360
System, Remote Starting .................................21
T
Telescoping Steering Column ...........................42
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............67
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................................. 114
Tilt Steering Column .........................................42
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 395
Tire Markings ................................................ 391
Tire Safety Information .................................. 391
Tires .................................. 329 , 398, 402, 406
Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 400
Air Pressure .............................................. 398
Chains ...................................................... 405
Changing .................................................. 333
Compact Spare ......................................... 403
General Information ........................ 398 , 402
High Speed ............................................... 399
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 398
Life Of Tires .............................................. 400
Load Capacity ........................................... 395
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
.........................................133 , 290
Quality Grading ......................................... 406
Radial ....................................................... 399
Replacement ............................................ 401
Rotation .................................................... 406
Safety ..............................................391 , 398
Sizes ......................................................... 392
Snow Tires ................................................ 402
Spare Tires .............................335 , 402, 403
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
441
Spinning
....................................................400
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................400
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................417
To Open Hood ................................................112
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................194
Top
Dual............................................................. 76
Hard ............................................................ 76
Power Sliding ............................................102
Removable .................................................. 76
Soft ............................................................. 76
Tow Hooks
Emergency
................................................345
Towing ........................................ 192 , 194, 344
Disabled Vehicle ........................................344
Recreational ..............................................198
Weight .......................................................194
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........................198
Trac-Lok
Rear Axle
...................................................161
Traction Control .............................................284
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................284
Trailer Towing ................................................192
Hitches ......................................................193
Minimum Requirements ............................195
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................194
Wiring ........................................................196
Trailer Towing Guide ......................................194
Trailer Weight ................................................ 194
Transfer Case ............................................... 376
Fluid ......................................................... 426
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ............ 157, 159
Maintenance ............................................ 376
Transmission ................................................ 153
Automatic ........................................ 153 , 376
Fluid ......................................................... 426
Maintenance ............................................ 376
Manual ..................................................... 149
Shifting ..................................................... 151
Transporting Pets .......................................... 327
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 400
Turn Signals ................................136 , 389, 390
U
UCI Connector
..................................................69
Uconnect
Phone Call Features ................................. 244
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ................................... 248
Uconnect Settings .......................................22
Uconnect Phone .........................240 , 241, 242
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
..................... 246
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
................ 246
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 250
Call Continuation ...................................... 248
Call Controls ............................................. 245
Call Termination ....................................... 247
Cancel Command ..................................... 241
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
..... 243
Help Command ......................................... 240
Join Calls .................................................. 247
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite
................................................ 243
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress ................................. 247
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 244
Natural Speech ......................................... 240
Operation .................................................. 240
Overview ................................................... 239
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
................................................... 241
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device
.................................................. 242
Phonebook Download ............................... 244
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ............... 247
Power-Up .................................................. 250
Recent Calls.............................................. 245
Redial ....................................................... 247
To Remove A Favorite ............................... 244
Toggling Between Calls ............................. 247
Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 245
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone .. 248
Voice Command ....................................... 248
11
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442
Uconnect Settings
............................... 207 , 208
Customer Programmable
Features
..................................22 , 26, 208
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 26
Uconnect System ...........................................222
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................406
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector
........................................................69
Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®) — If Equipped
S
...................... 53
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................299
USB ................................................................. 69
USB Port .......................................................... 69
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................52
Vehicle Finder ...................................... 263 , 268
Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 265
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 265
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 417
Vehicle Loading ................................... 191 , 395
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 359
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................11
Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 265
Vehicle Settings ............................................ 207
Vehicle Storage ............................................. 407
Voice Command ............................ 50 , 251, 253
Climate ........................................................67
Voice Recognition ............................................50
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................50
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
................................................. 132
Warnings, Roll Over ..........................................10
Warranty Information .................................... 429
Washers, Windshield .................................... 358
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 409
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel ................................................ 362
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 404
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 404
Wi-Fi .............................................................. 263
Wind Buffeting .................................................76
Window Fogging ...............................................68
Window Storage ...............................................84
Windows ..........................................................75
Power...........................................................75
Windshield
Folding ...................................................... 109
Windshield Defroster .................................... 327
Windshield Washers .............................. 60 , 358
Fluid.......................................................... 358
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 368
Windshield Wipers ...........................................60
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 368
Wipers, Rear ....................................................61
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
Second Edition
22_JL_OM_EN_USC
2022 WRANGLER
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2022 WRANGLER
OWNER’S MANUAL
